64 e stf-1

TECHNICAL REPORT CEN/TR 15193-2
RAPPORT TECHNIQUE
TECHNISCHER BERICHT March 2017
ICS 91.120.10; 91.140.99; 91.160.01
English Version
Energy performance of buildings - Energy requirements

for lighting - Part 2: Explanation and justification of EN
15193-1, Module M9
Performance énergétique des bâtiments - Exigences Energetische Bewertung von Gebäuden - Energetische
énergétiques pour l'éclairage - Partie 2: Explication et Anforderungen an die Beleuchtung - Teil 2:
justification de l'EN 15193-1, Module M9 Technischer Bericht zu EN 15193-1
This Technical Report was approved by CEN on 27 February 2017. It has been drawn up by the Technical Committee CEN/TC
169.
CEN members are the national standards bodies of Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia,
Finland, Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania,
Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland,
Turkey and United Kingdom.
EUROPEAN COMMITTEE FOR STANDARDIZATION

COMITÉ EUROPÉEN DE NORMALISATION
EUROPÄISCHES KOMITEE FÜR NORMUNG
CEN-CENELEC Management Centre: Avenue Marnix 17, B-1000 Brussels
© 2017 CEN All rights of exploitation in any form and by any means reserved Ref. No. CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 E
worldwide for CEN national Members.
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Contents Page
European foreword....................................................................................................................................................... 9
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................. 11
1 Scope ................................................................................................................................................................. 14
2 Normative references ................................................................................................................................. 14
3 Terms and definitions ................................................................................................................................ 14
4 Symbols and abbreviations ...................................................................................................................... 15
4.1 Symbols ............................................................................................................................................................ 15
4.2 Subscripts........................................................................................................................................................ 20
4.3 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................................ 20
5 Brief description of the method(s) and routing ................................................................................ 20
5.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 20
5.2 Selection criteria .......................................................................................................................................... 22
6 Method 1 – Calculation of the energy required for lighting .......................................................... 22
6.1 Rationale ......................................................................................................................................................... 22
6.2 Time steps ....................................................................................................................................................... 22
6.3 Assumptions................................................................................................................................................... 23
6.4 Data input ....................................................................................................................................................... 23
6.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 23
6.4.2 New or refurbished building lighting system data .......................................................................... 24
6.4.3 Existing building lighting system data ................................................................................................. 24
6.4.4 Lighting system product data .................................................................................................................. 24
6.4.5 Lighting system dependency factors data ........................................................................................... 25
6.5 Operating conditions .................................................................................................................................. 25
6.6 Calculation information ............................................................................................................................. 25
6.7 Expenditure factors for lighting systems ............................................................................................ 26
6.7.1 Energy need and energy use for lighting ............................................................................................. 27
6.7.2 Expenditure factor for lighting................................................................................................................ 28
6.7.3 Application of expenditure factors ........................................................................................................ 37
6.7.4 Approach to expenditure factors for lighting systems ................................................................... 47
6.7.5 Expenditure factors for lighting systems calculation ..................................................................... 48
7 Method 2 – Quick calculation of the energy required for lighting.............................................. 48
7.1 Rationale ......................................................................................................................................................... 48
7.2 Time steps ....................................................................................................................................................... 48
7.3 Assumptions................................................................................................................................................... 48
7.4 Data input ....................................................................................................................................................... 49
7.5 Simplified input ............................................................................................................................................ 49
7.6.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 49
7.6.2 Calculation of installed power for illumination ................................................................................ 49
7.6.3 Calculation of installed power for standby system .......................................................................... 50
7.6.4 Occupancy dependency factor (FO) ........................................................................................................ 50
7.6.5 Daylight supply dependency factor (FD) calculation ....................................................................... 50
7.6.6 Constant illuminance dependency factor (FC) ................................................................................... 52
7.7 Expenditure factors for lighting systems ............................................................................................ 53
2
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
8 Method 3 – Metered energy used for lighting..................................................................................... 53

8.1 Rationale .......................................................................................................................................................... 53
8.2 Time steps ....................................................................................................................................................... 53
8.3 Assumptions ................................................................................................................................................... 54
8.4 Data input ........................................................................................................................................................ 54
8.5 Simplified input ............................................................................................................................................. 54
8.6.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 54
8.6.2 Calculation procedure of annual energy .............................................................................................. 56
8.7 Expenditure factors for lighting systems ............................................................................................. 56
9 Quality control ............................................................................................................................................... 56
9.1 Method 1 .......................................................................................................................................................... 56
9.2 Method 2 .......................................................................................................................................................... 56
9.3 Method 3 .......................................................................................................................................................... 56
10 Compliance Check......................................................................................................................................... 57
11 Worked out examples ................................................................................................................................. 57
11.1 Method 1 .......................................................................................................................................................... 57
11.1.1 Example 1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 57
11.1.2 Example 2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 58
11.2 Method 2 .......................................................................................................................................................... 59
11.2.1 Example 1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 59
11.2.2 Example 2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 59
11.3 Method 3 .......................................................................................................................................................... 59
11.3.1 Example 1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 59
12 Application range ......................................................................................................................................... 60
12.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 60
12.2 Energy performance .................................................................................................................................... 60
12.3 Energy certificate.......................................................................................................................................... 60
12.4 Inspection ........................................................................................................................................................ 60
12.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 60
12.4.2 Method 1 .......................................................................................................................................................... 60
12.4.3 Method 2 .......................................................................................................................................................... 60
12.4.4 Method 3 .......................................................................................................................................................... 60
13 Regulation use ............................................................................................................................................... 61
14 Information on the accompanying spreadsheet................................................................................ 61
15 Results of the validation tests .................................................................................................................. 61
Annex A (informative) Input and method selection data sheet – Template ......................................... 62
A.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 62
A.2 System design data ....................................................................................................................................... 62
Annex B (informative) Input and selection data sheet - Default choices............................................... 63
B.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 63
B.2 Method 1 .......................................................................................................................................................... 63
B.3 Method 2 .......................................................................................................................................................... 63
B.4 Method 3 .......................................................................................................................................................... 63
Annex C (informative) Simplified Method for Installed Power Estimation .......................................... 64
3
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
C.1 Installed power assessment for tertiary buildings .......................................................................... 64

C.1.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 64
C.1.2 Estimation of the installed power for illumination ......................................................................... 64
C.1.3 Evaluation of Pj.lx ........................................................................................................................................... 65
C.1.4 Evaluation of FMF ........................................................................................................................................... 66
C.1.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 66
C.1.4.2 Lamp Lumen (Luminous Flux) Maintenance Factor (LLMF) ........................................................ 66
C.1.4.3 Lamp Survival Factor (LSF) ...................................................................................................................... 66
C.1.4.3.1 LED Maintenance Factor ...................................................................................................................... 67
C.1.4.4 Luminaire Maintenance Factor (LMF) .................................................................................................. 68
C.1.4.5 Room Surface Maintenance Factor (RSMF) ........................................................................................ 69
C.1.5 Evaluation of FCA ........................................................................................................................................... 77
C.1.6 Evaluation of FL ............................................................................................................................................. 77
C.2 Installed power assessment for domestic buildings ....................................................................... 78
C.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 78
C.2.2 Estimation of the installed power for illumination ......................................................................... 78
Annex D (informative) Assessment of the installed power for lighting systems in existing
buildings .......................................................................................................................................................... 79
Annex E (informative) Occupancy estimation ................................................................................................ 80
Annex F (informative) Daylight availability .................................................................................................... 82
F.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 82
F.2 Building segmentation: Spaces benefiting from daylight .............................................................. 82
F.3 Daylight supply factor for vertical facades ......................................................................................... 87
F.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 87
F.3.2 Daylight factor classification.................................................................................................................... 92
F.3.3 Daylight supply factor ................................................................................................................................ 96
F.3.4 Example ......................................................................................................................................................... 101
F.4 Daylight supply factor for rooflights ................................................................................................... 104
F.4.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 104
F.4.2 Daylight availability factor ..................................................................................................................... 104
F.4.3 Daylight supply factor .............................................................................................................................. 105
F.4.4 Example ......................................................................................................................................................... 117
F.5 Daylight Responsive Control Systems ................................................................................................ 121
F.6 Monthly evaluation method ................................................................................................................... 122
F.7 Determination of daytime and night time hours ............................................................................ 124
F.8 Comprehensive calculation .................................................................................................................... 124
F.9 Light pipes..................................................................................................................................................... 124
4
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
F.10 References .................................................................................................................................................... 125

Annex G (informative) Constant illuminance ............................................................................................... 126
G.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 126
G.2 Constant illuminance factor (Fc) .......................................................................................................... 126
G.3 Constant lumen output system (CLO)................................................................................................. 127
Annex H (informative) Standby system energy requirements .............................................................. 128
H.1 Emergency lighting luminaire standby charging power (Pei).................................................... 128
H.2 Lighting controls standby power (Pci) ................................................................................................ 128
Annex I (informative) Calculation Flowchart ............................................................................................... 129
Annex J (informative) Calculation examples ................................................................................................ 131
J.1 Method 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 131
J.1.1 Example 1 — New design manufacturing building........................................................................ 131
J.1.1.1 Site details .................................................................................................................................................... 131
J.1.1.2 Entrance details ......................................................................................................................................... 132
J.1.1.3 Toilet details................................................................................................................................................ 136
J.1.1.4 Office details ................................................................................................................................................ 138
J.1.1.5 Factory details ............................................................................................................................................ 143
J.1.1.6 Manufacturing building energy requirement ................................................................................. 147
J.1.2 Example 2 – New design residential bungalow............................................................................... 148
J.1.2.1 Site details .................................................................................................................................................... 148
J.1.2.2 Living room .................................................................................................................................................. 148
J.1.2.3 Dining room ................................................................................................................................................. 149
J.1.2.4 Kitchen........................................................................................................................................................... 149
J.1.2.5 Bathroom ...................................................................................................................................................... 149
J.1.2.6 Bedroom1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 150
J.1.2.7 Bedroom2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 150
J.1.2.8 Hall .................................................................................................................................................................. 150
J.1.2.9 Building energy requirement................................................................................................................ 150
J.2 Method 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 151
J.2.1 Example 1 – New design manufacturing building .......................................................................... 151
J.2.1.1 Site details .................................................................................................................................................... 151
J.2.1.2 Entrance details ......................................................................................................................................... 151
J.2.1.3 Toilet details................................................................................................................................................ 153
J.2.1.4 Office details ................................................................................................................................................ 154
J.2.1.5 Factory details ............................................................................................................................................ 155
J.2.1.6 Manufacturing building energy requirement ................................................................................. 157
5
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
J.2.2 Example 2 – New design residential bungalow ............................................................................... 157

J.2.2.1 Site details..................................................................................................................................................... 157
J.2.2.2 Living room .................................................................................................................................................. 158
J.2.2.3 Dining room ................................................................................................................................................. 158
J.2.2.4 Kitchen ........................................................................................................................................................... 158
J.2.2.5 Bathroom ...................................................................................................................................................... 158
J.2.2.6 Bedroom1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 158
J.2.2.7 Bedroom2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 158
J.2.2.8 Hall .................................................................................................................................................................. 158
J.2.2.9 Building energy requirement ................................................................................................................ 158
J.3 Method 3 ........................................................................................................................................................ 159
J.3.1 Example 1 – Existing manufacturing building ................................................................................. 159
J.3.1.1 Site details..................................................................................................................................................... 159
J.3.1.2 Annual meter readings............................................................................................................................. 159
J.3.1.3 Building LENI ............................................................................................................................................... 159
Annex K (informative) Lighting controls ........................................................................................................ 160
K.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 160
K.2 Manual controls .......................................................................................................................................... 160
K.2.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 160
K.2.2 On/Off control ............................................................................................................................................. 160
K.2.3 On/Off Dimming control .......................................................................................................................... 161
K.3 Automatic controls .................................................................................................................................... 161
K.3.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 161
K.3.2 Timed on/off control ................................................................................................................................ 161
K.3.3 Sensor activated control .......................................................................................................................... 161
K.3.4 Occupancy sensor....................................................................................................................................... 161
K.3.4.1 Absence detection ...................................................................................................................................... 162
K.3.4.2 Presence detection .................................................................................................................................... 162
K.3.5 Light level sensor ....................................................................................................................................... 162
K.3.5.1 Daylight harvesting ................................................................................................................................... 162
K.3.5.2 Constant illuminance ................................................................................................................................ 162
K.3.5.3 Combined sensor ........................................................................................................................................ 163
K.4 Lighting control systems ......................................................................................................................... 163
K.4.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 163
K.4.2 Standalone (self-contained) lighting control system .................................................................... 163
K.4.3 Linked lighting control system.............................................................................................................. 163
6
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
K.4.4 Integrated building control system..................................................................................................... 163

K.4.5 Algorithmic lighting .................................................................................................................................. 163
K.4.6 Lighting installations with Scene Setting .......................................................................................... 164
Annex L (informative) Spread sheet and flow diagram ............................................................................ 165
Annex M (informative) Benchmark values.................................................................................................... 166
Annex N (informative) Domestic lighting guide .......................................................................................... 169
N.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 169
N.2 Lighting design ........................................................................................................................................... 169
N.2.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................... 169
N.2.2 Kitchen........................................................................................................................................................... 169
N.2.2.1 Worktop lighting ........................................................................................................................................ 169
N.2.2.2 Strip lights under cabinets ..................................................................................................................... 170
N.2.2.3 Spot lights under cabinets ...................................................................................................................... 170
N.2.2.4 Extractor hood lighting............................................................................................................................ 170
N.2.2.5 General and ambient lighting................................................................................................................ 170
N.2.2.6 Strip lights above cabinets ..................................................................................................................... 170
N.2.2.7 Ceiling lights ................................................................................................................................................ 170
N.2.2.8 Chandeliers and pendant luminaires ................................................................................................. 170
N.2.2.9 Recessed downlights ................................................................................................................................ 171
N.2.3 Dining room ................................................................................................................................................. 171
N.2.3.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................... 171
N.2.3.2 Dining table lighting ................................................................................................................................. 171
N.2.3.3 Pendant luminaires .................................................................................................................................. 171
N.2.3.5 Recessed downlights ................................................................................................................................ 171
N.2.3.6 Wall lights ..................................................................................................................................................... 171
N.2.3.7 Cornice strip lighting ................................................................................................................................ 171
N.2.4 Living room .................................................................................................................................................. 172
N.2.4.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................... 172
N.2.4.2 Reading lights.............................................................................................................................................. 172
N.2.5 Bathroom and toilets................................................................................................................................ 173
N.2.5.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................... 173
N.2.5.2 Mirror lighting ............................................................................................................................................ 173
N.2.5.3 General lighting .......................................................................................................................................... 173
N.2.5.4 Toilet lighting .............................................................................................................................................. 173
7
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
N.2.6 Bedroom ........................................................................................................................................................ 173

N.2.6.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 173
N.2.6.2 Task lighting ................................................................................................................................................ 174
N.2.6.3 Bedside luminaires .................................................................................................................................... 174
N.2.6.4 Desk luminaires .......................................................................................................................................... 174
N.2.6.5 General and ambient lighting ................................................................................................................ 174
N.2.7 Entrance hall, corridors and stairs ...................................................................................................... 174
N.2.8 Storeroom, cellar and laundry room................................................................................................... 174
N.3 Considerations about daylight .............................................................................................................. 175
N.3.1 Key parameters........................................................................................................................................... 175
N.3.2 Access to daylight ....................................................................................................................................... 175
N.3.3 The quantity of daylight entering the premises.............................................................................. 175
N.3.4 Visual contact with the outdoors .......................................................................................................... 176
N.3.5 Quality of the view ..................................................................................................................................... 176
N.3.6 Presence of a daylight management system .................................................................................... 177
N.3.7 Presence of a control system for the daylight management system ....................................... 177
N.4 Targets ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
N.4.1 Lighting types .............................................................................................................................................. 178
N.4.2 Useful areas in domestic buildings ...................................................................................................... 178
N.4.3 Values ............................................................................................................................................................. 178
Annex O (informative) Lighting outside the building ................................................................................ 180
O.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 180
O.2 Security lighting.......................................................................................................................................... 180
O.3 Pathway and amenity areas lighting ................................................................................................... 180
O.4 Architectural floodlighting ..................................................................................................................... 180
O.5 Lighting of outdoor workplaces ............................................................................................................ 180
Annex P (informative) Method for estimating energy for lighting hourly ......................................... 181
P.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 181
P.2 Assumptions................................................................................................................................................. 181
P.3 Data input ..................................................................................................................................................... 181
P.4 Calculations .................................................................................................................................................. 181
P.5 Energy required .......................................................................................................................................... 181
P.6 Worked example of hourly energy for lighting ............................................................................... 182
Bibliography ............................................................................................................................................................... 184
8
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
European foreword
This document (CEN/TR 15193-2:2017) has been prepared by Technical Committee CEN/TC 169 “Light
and lighting”, the secretariat of which is held by DIN.
Attention is drawn to the possibility that some of the elements of this document may be the subject of
patent rights. CEN shall not be held responsible for identifying any or all such patent rights.
This document has been prepared under a mandate given to CEN by the European Commission and the
European Free Trade Association.
This document has been prepared by the Working Group CEN/TC169/WG 9 "Energy performance of
buildings".
The document layout is structured to largely follow the content of the standard EN 15193-1:2017.
EN 15193 consists of the following parts, under the general title "Energy performance of buildings —
Energy requirements for lighting"
— Part 1: Specifications, Module M9
— Part 2: (Technical Report) Explanation and justification of EN 15193-1, Module M9
Directive 2010/31/EU recasting the Directive 2002/91/EC on energy performance of buildings (EPBD,
[EF4] [4]) promotes the improvement of the energy performance of buildings within the European
Union, taking into account all types of energy uses (heating, lighting, cooling, air conditioning,
ventilation) and outdoor climatic and local conditions, as well as indoor climate requirements and cost
effectiveness (Article 1).
The directive requires Member States to adopt measures and tools to achieve the prudent and rational
use of energy resources. In order to achieve those goals, the EPBD requires increasing energy efficiency
and the enhanced use of renewable energies in both new and existing buildings. One tool for this is the
application by Member States of minimum requirements on the energy performance of new buildings
and for existing buildings that are subject to major renovation, as well as for minimum performance
requirements for the building envelope if energy-relevant parts are replaced or retrofitted. Other tools
are energy certification of buildings, inspection of boilers and air-conditioning systems.
The use of European Standards increases the accessibility, transparency and objectivity of the energy
performance assessment in the Member States facilitating the comparison of best practices and
supporting the internal market for construction products. The use of EPB-standards for calculating
energy performance, as well as for energy performance certification and the inspection of heating
systems and boilers, ventilation and air-conditioning systems will reduce costs compared to developing
different standards at national level.
The first mandate to CEN to develop a set of CEN EPBD standards (M 343, [EF1] [1]), to support the first
edition of the EPBD ([EF2] [2]) resulted in the successful publication of all EPBD related CEN standards
in 2007-2008.
The mandate M 480 was issued to review the mandate M 343 as the recast of the EPBD raised the need
to revisit the standards and reformulate and add standards so that they become on the one hand
unambiguous and compatible, and on the other hand a clear and explicit overview of the choices,
boundary conditions and input data that need to be defined at national or regional level. Such national
9
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
or regional choices remain necessary, due to differences in climate, culture and building tradition,
policy and legal frameworks. Consequently, the set of CEN-EPBD standards published in 2007-2008 had
to be improved and expanded on the basis of the recast of the EPBD.
The EPB standards are flexible enough to allow for necessary national and regional differentiation and
facilitate Member States implementation and the setting of requirements by the Member States.
Further target groups are users of the voluntary common European Union certification scheme for the
energy performance of non-residential buildings (EPBD art.11.9) and any other regional (e.g. Pan
European) parties wanting to motivate their assumptions by classifying the building energy
performance for a dedicated building stock.
10
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Introduction
The set of EPB standards, technical reports and supporting tools

In order to facilitate the necessary overall consistency and coherence, in terminology, approach,
input/output relations and formats, for the whole set of EPB-standards, the following documents and
tools are available:
a) a document with basic principles to be followed in drafting EPB-standards:
CEN/TS 16628:2014, Energy Performance of Buildings - Basic Principles for the set of EPB
standards [5];
b) a document with detailed technical rules to be followed in drafting EPB-standards;

CEN/TS 16629:2014, Energy Performance of Buildings - Detailed Technical Rules for the set of
EPB-standards [6];
c) the detailed technical rules are the basis for the following tools:
1) a common template for each EPB-standard, including specific drafting instructions for the
relevant clauses;
2) a common template for each technical report that accompanies an EPB standard or a cluster of
EPB standards, including specific drafting instructions for the relevant clauses;
3) a common template for the spreadsheet that accompanies each EPB standard, to demonstrate
the correctness of the EPB calculation procedures.
Each EPB-standards follows the basic principles and the detailed technical rules and relates to the
overarching EPB-standard, EN ISO 52000-1:2017.
One of the main purposes of the revision of the EPB-standards is to enable that laws and regulations
directly refer to the EPB-standards and make compliance with them compulsory. This requires that the
set of EPB-standards consists of a systematic, clear, comprehensive and unambiguous set of energy
performance procedures. The number of options provided is kept as low as possible, taking into
account national and regional differences in climate, culture and building tradition, policy and legal
frameworks (subsidiarity principle). For each option, an informative default option is provided
(Annex B).
Rationale behind the EPB technical reports
There is a risk that the purpose and limitations of the EPB standards will be misunderstood, unless the
background and context to their contents – and the thinking behind them – is explained in some detail
to readers of the standards. Consequently, various types of informative contents are recorded and made
available for users to properly understand, apply and nationally or regionally implement the EPB
standards.
If this explanation would have been attempted in the standards themselves, the result is likely to be
confusing and cumbersome, especially if the standards are implemented or referenced in national or
regional building codes.
Therefore each EPB standard is accompanied by an informative technical report, like this one, where all
informative content is collected, to ensure a clear separation between normative and informative
contents (see CEN/TS 16629 [6]):
— to avoid flooding and confusing the actual normative part with informative content,
— to reduce the page count of the actual standard, and
11
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
— to facilitate understanding of the set of EPB standards.
This was also one of the main recommendations from the European CENSE project [8] that laid the
foundation for the preparation of the set of EPB standards.
This Technical Report
This Technical Report accompanies the standard EN 15193-1:2017 on energy requirements for lighting
in buildings. The role and the positioning of the accompanied standard in the set of EPB standards is
defined in the Introduction to the standard.
All buildings occupied by humans require lighting indoors so that people have satisfactory visibility to
move around and be able to participate in activities and carry out visual tasks. The lighting conditions
required vary for different buildings, activities and visual tasks and these are well defined in the CEN
lighting application standards EN 12464-1 for indoor work places, EN 12193 for sports facilities and
EN 1838 for emergency lighting. As yet there are no CEN standards for lighting of domestic buildings
but this document gives some guidance on requirements and solutions in Annex N.
It is very important that all occupied buildings or places have the right lighting conditions and that this
lighting is provided by energy efficient solutions. Such solutions can be achieved with electric light or
daylight or a combination of the two and are managed by appropriate lighting controls. The correct
lighting solution for all buildings or places is established by comprehensive lighting design process. As
yet there are no standards defining the lighting design process and the lighting design process is not
part of this document. However, this Technical Report provides a general overview of the processes
involved in interior lighting design as illustrated in Figure 1. Making comprehensive lighting design for
new or refurbished buildings can yield effective and energy efficient lighting solutions that fulfil all the
lighting criteria specified in the appropriate lighting application standards.
12
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Figure 1 — General overview of the comprehensive lighting design process
The lighting design will include lighting controls that maybe passive (operated manually) or active
(automatically controlled) or a combination of the two systems. The lighting controls can be an integral
part of the lighting system and the power required for operation is included in the estimation of the
energy requirements for lighting. However, the lighting control can be independent of the lighting
system and the power needed for these is not included in the estimation of the energy required for
lighting.
There might be requirements to provide lighting outside the building such as pathway lights to assist
visibility for safe movement and security lighting around the perimeter for the protection of the
buildings, and lighting of outdoor workplaces see EN 12464-2:2014. Floodlighting to beautify the façade
or entrance at night can also be added. These lighting systems are described in Annex O. The energy for
these outdoor lighting systems can be supplied from the building but they are not included in the
calculation of the energy requirements for lighting in the building.
Accompanying spreadsheet(s)
Concerning the accompanied standard EN 15193-1:2017 a spreadsheet was produced. In this Technical
Report, examples of the calculations are included.
13
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
1 Scope
This Technical Report is accompanying the lighting standard EN 15193-1:2017 and gives information to
support the correct understanding, use and national implementation of this lighting standard.
This document provides:
— commentary to clauses of the standard;
— explanation on the procedures and gives background information;
— justification of the choices that have been made;
— description of the processes;
— spreadsheet of the calculation process;
— worked examples and benchmark values;
— advice on lighting control systems; and
— guidance on the lighting design for domestic buildings.
This document discusses but does not formally detail the lighting design process.
2 Normative references
The following documents, in whole or in part, are normatively referenced in this document and are
indispensable for its application. For dated references, only the edition cited applies. For undated
references, the latest edition of the referenced document (including any amendments) applies.
EN 12665, Light and lighting - Basic terms and criteria for specifying lighting requirements
EN 15193-1:2017, Energy performance of buildings - Energy requirements for lighting - Part 1:

Specifications, Module M9
EN ISO 52000-1:2017, Energy performance of buildings — Overarching EPB assessment — Part 1:

General framework and procedures (ISO 52000-1:2017)
3 Terms and definitions

For the purposes of this document, the terms and definitions given in EN ISO 52000-1:2017, EN 15193-
1:2017, EN 12665 and the following apply.
3.1
circuit
electrical network composed of components connected by conductive wires through which electric
current can flow and perform various operations
3.2
general lighting
substantially uniform lighting of an area without provision for special local requirements
14
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
3.3
localized lighting
lighting designed to illuminate an area with a higher illuminance at certain specified positions, for
instance those at which work is carried out
3.4
local lighting
lighting for a specific visual task, additional to and controlled separately from the general lighting
3.5
useful area
A
area of the building normally occupied or used and is being considered (unit: m2)
4 Symbols and abbreviations

4.1 Symbols
For the purposes of this document, the symbols given in EN ISO 52000-1:2017, EN 15193-1:2017 and
the specific symbols listed in Table 1 apply.
Table 1 — Symbols and units
ACa Area of the raw building carcass opening of the area under m²
consideration
AD Partial area which is lit by daylight m²
aD Depth of the daylight area m
aD,max Maximum depth of the daylight area m
ADj Area receiving daylight m²
AFS Glazed area of a dome or strip skylight m²
aln,At Depth of the courtyard or atrium m
AND The area not lit by daylight m²
ANDj Area not receiving daylight m²
ARb Glazed area of a shed rooflight m²
AS Sum of task areas within the room m²
bD Width of the daylight area m
bln,At Width of the courtyard or atrium m
Cwe Factor for reduction to take account of weekends -
D Daylight factor %
Da External daylight factor %
DAC,j Daylight factor for raw carcass opening %
DCA Daylight factor from carcass opening %
Dclass Classification of daylight availability -
DSA Mean daylight factor with rooflight, shading activated %
DSNA Mean daylight factor with rooflight, shading not activated %
15
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
EA Horizontal external illuminance from an overcast sky lx

EF Illuminance on the external surface of the skylight from overcast sky lx
eL Expenditure factor for lighting systems -
eL,C Partial expenditure factor for constant illuminance control -
eL,D Partial expenditure factor for daylight dependant lighting control -
eL,ES Partial expenditure factor for the electric lighting system -
eL,ES,del Partial expenditure factor for delivery of electric light -
eL,ES,dis Partial expenditure factor for distribution of electric light -
eL,ES,gen Partial expenditure factor for generation of electric light -
eL,O Partial expenditure factor for occupancy dependant lighting control -
Em Maintained illuminance lx
ESUR Maintained illuminance on immediate surround of task area lx

Etask Maintained illuminance on the task area lx
F Dependency Factor -
FA Absence factor -
fB The efficiency of the operating device -
Fc Constant illuminance factor -
FCA Factor for reduced power of area -
Fcc Factor for the efficiency of the constant illuminance control -
FCOD Factor for the over design of the illuminance by using more
luminaires to suit the required layout
FD Daylight dependency factor -
FD,C Lighting control factor -
FD,C,nj Daylight responsive control system factor for the area under -
consideration
FD,j,i Factor for monthly partial-load daylight operation -
FD,mth Monthly daylight dependency factor -
FD,n,j Daylight dependency factor for the area under consideration -
FD,S Daylight supply factor -
FD,S,j Daylight supply factor for a vertical façade -
FD,S,nj Daylight supply factor for the area under consideration -
FD,S,SA,j Daylight supply factor of the area when solar or glare protection -
system is activated
FD,S,SNA,j Daylight supply factor of the area for when solar or glare protection -
system is not activated
FL Factor for equipment efficiency -
FMF Correction factor for MF -
Fo Occupancy dependency factor -
Foc Controls function factor -
16
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Fu Utilization factor of the luminaire -

Fue Utilization factor for determination of the energy use -
Hdir Luminous exposure from direct insolation lx s
Hdir / Hglob Ratio for climate characterization -
Hglob Luminous exposure from global insolation Lx s
hLi Height of the window lintel above the floor m
hlm,At Height of the courtyard or atrium from floor level to the roof level m
hm Mounting height of luminaire m
hR Distance between workplane and ceiling m
hRj Distance between floor and ceiling height in an area with roof lights m
hTa Height of the task area above the floor. m
IRD,j Space depth index of the area under consideration -
ISh,GDF Correction factor for glazed double façades of the area under -
consideration
ISh,hA Correction factor for overhang shading of the area under -
consideration
ISh,j Shading index of the area under consideration -
ISh,lsh Correction factor for linear obstruction of the area under -
consideration
ISh,ln,At Correction factor for internal courtyard and atrium shading of the -
area under consideration
ISh,vA Correction factor for side shading of the area under consideration -
ISh,vf Correction factor for vertical projection -
ITr,j Transparency index in the area under consideration -
Ji Day of the month -
K Room Index -
k1 Reduction factor for the frames or subdivisions -
k2 Reduction factor for pollution of the glazing -
k3 Reduction factor of non-vertical light incident upon the glazing -
kObl,1 Reduction factor for the frames or subdivisions in rooflights -
kObl,2 Reduction factor by pollution of the glazing of rooflights -
kObl,3 Reduction factor for non-vertical light incidence on the rooflight -
glazing
kSh,GDF,1 Reduction factor for the frames or subdivisions in a double glazed -
façade
kSh,GDF,2 Reduction factor by pollution of the glazing of the double glazed -
façade
kSh,GDF,3 Reduction factor for non-vertical light incidence on the façade glazing -
kSh,ln,At,1 Reduction factor for the frames or subdivisions in the atrium façade -
kSh,ln,At,2 Reduction factor by pollution of the glazing of the atrium façade -
17
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
kSh,ln,At,3 Reduction factor for non-vertical light incidence of the atrium façade -
L80 time period at which x % of the measured initial luminous flux value -
is maintained
LR Length of room m
Ni Number days in the respective month d
Pci Luminaire control standby power W
pe Electrical evaluation power for determination of the energy use W
Pei Luminaire emergency standby power W
Pem Total emergency standby power W
Pi Luminaire power W
Pj Power density of the area W/m²
Pj,lx Power density per lux W/lm
Pmax Maximum luminaire power with value taken at the end of the W
luminaire light source maintenance cycle
Pmin Minimum luminaire power with value taken at the start of the W
luminaire light source maintenance cycle
Pn Total power of n number of luminaires W
Ppc Total controls standby power W
tas,i Time usage after sunset h
tbs,i Time usage before sunrise h
tD Daylight time h
tDay Monthly daylight time hours h
tDay,nj Daylight time for the area under consideration h
te Battery charge time only h
teff,Day,nj Daylight effective time for the area under consideration h
tend,i Time at the end of usage Real time in h
teq Time difference between apparent solar time and mean solar time h
(equation of time)
tN Daylight absence time h
tNight Monthly night time hours h
trel,D,SA,j The relative portion of the total operating time during which the solar h
or glare protection system is activated
trel,D,SNA,j The relative portion of the total operating time during which the solar h
or glare protection system is not activated
ts Time step Hour / month / year
tSA Time when solar or glare protection is activated h
tSNA Time when solar or glare protection is not activate h
tstart,i Time of the beginning of usage Real time in h
tsunrise,i Sunrise time Real time in h
tsunset,i Sunset time Real time in h
18
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
ttot Total operating hours h

ty Number of hours in a standard year h
vmonth,j Factor for monthly distribution -
Waz Annual energy required for lighting for an area or zone kWh/year
wi Well index -
WL,t Total energy for illumination kWh
Wmt Metered energy kWh
Wnd Energy needed for lighting kWh
Wpc Standby energy density for automatic lighting controls of the kWh/m2 year
luminaire per year
Wpe Standby energy density for battery charging of emergency luminaires kWh/m2 year
per year
WP,t Total energy for standby kWh/ts
wR Width of room m
Wt Energy per time step W / ts
WUS Energy used for lighting kWh
ϒ Latitude angle degrees
γSh,lsh Obstruction altitude angle degrees
γSh,hf Horizontal shading angle due to horizontal projection degrees
γSh,vf Vertical shading angle due to vertical projection degrees
δ Declination of the sun Degrees
ΔFD,S,j Difference of daylight supply factor
ηL Lamp (light source) luminous efficacy lm/W
ηLB Luminaire light output ratio -
ηR Utilance -
ρC Reflectance of ceiling -
ρF Reflectance of floor -
ρW Reflectance of walls -
τD65,SA Transmittance of diffuse rooflight glazing with shading activated -
τD65,SNA Transmittance of the façade glazing for vertical incident light -
τeff Effective transmittance -
τeff,SNA,j Effective transmittance of the façade glazing when solar or glare -
protection system is not activated
τSh,GDF,D65 Transmittance of the external layer of glazing of the double glazed -
façade
τSh,ln,At,D65 Transmittance of the atrium glazing -
Φ Latitude degrees
ωi Hour angle degrees
19
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
4.2 Subscripts
For the purposes of this document, the subscripts given in EN ISO 52000-1:2017, EN 15193-1:2017 and
the specific symbols listed in Table 2 apply.
Table 2 — Subscripts
L lighting an annual m monthly
occ occupied period
4.3 Abbreviations
For the purposes of this document, the abbreviations given in EN ISO 52000-1:2017, EN 15193-1:2017
and the specific symbols listed in Table 3 apply.
Table 3 — Abbreviations
BMS Building Management System -
CFL Compact Fluorescent Lamp -
LED Light Emitting Diode -
T16 16 mm diameter linear fluorescent tube -
T26 26 mm diameter linear fluorescent tube -
TH Tungsten Halogen lamp -
CFS Complex Fenestration Systems -
SP System Potential -
CLO Constant Lumen Output -
PIR Passive Infrared Sensor -
PE Photo Electric cell sensor -
DALI Digital Addressable Lighting Interface -
PC Personal Computer -
CAD Computer Aided Design -
N North -
E East -
S South -
W West -
5 Brief description of the method(s) and routing

5.1 General
The standard gives three methods for the assessment of the energy required for electric lighting within
buildings in the residential and non-residential lighting sectors. There are two methods for the
estimation by calculations and one by direct metering of the energy for lighting. Figure 2 illustrates the
general flow of the assessment process. The calculation methods can be used during feasibility study or
detailed design of new or refurbished buildings and for the assessment of energy use in existing
buildings. The metered method can only be used in existing buildings that have segregated lighting
circuits that includes meters to facilitate direct metering of the energy used for lighting only or a
building management system that can measure energy use by lighting. The metering by BMS (Building
Management System) or other remotely managed smart systems are not covered by this Technical
Report but examples of direct metering of lighting circuits are given in 8.6.1. The calculations method
can be applied to existing buildings by first performing a lighting installation audit.
20
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Figure 2 — Overview of the flow of the process to determine the required energy for lighting and
LENI, the indicator of the energy efficiency of the lighting, in buildings
The methods described will yield the electric energy required for lighting in the selected time steps and
can provide the Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator (LENI) for the building, room or zones. LENI can be
used for comparison of similar buildings and also as a measure of the lighting energy performance of
the building.
This document provides examples for calculation checks and assistance in the development of
calculation software tool with the aid of a suitable spread sheet. The spread sheet will show the data
needs and calculation process and can be used for validation.
For new and refurbished buildings there are two calculation methods. The first 'Method 1' is the
preferred route that follows a comprehensive procedure and the second 'Method 2' is a simplified quick
method for the lighting energy estimation.
Method 1 assumes that for the building a comprehensive lighting system design has been performed.
The lighting system design produced the required lighting scheme and was based on real data of the
specified products. The scheme and product information provides the input to the lighting energy
estimation process. For existing buildings the process involves making an audit of the lighting scheme
to establish the installed lighting load. Method 1 is the most accurate calculation method.
Method 2 is a quick method making use of default data in the approximation procedure to calculate the
budget installed load and the energy requirement for lighting.
Method 3 is by metering and will give the most accurate measure of the energy used for lighting.
For the indication of the lighting energy efficiency in the buildings LENI offers a valuable measure. LENI
(the Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator) is a simple concept and gives a very good comparative
21
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
measure for the lighting energy efficiency performance of buildings. The measure can be used for
comparing the performance of similar building types in the EU. The measure can also offer the
opportunity to set lighting efficiency ratings or benchmarks for designers of lighting solutions. LENI has
been in use since 2007 and several EU member states have adopted it as the tool for setting lighting
efficiency measures in buildings.
5.2 Selection criteria
The standard offers calculation methods, with different levels of accuracy for the installed power,
occupancy estimation and daylight availability and these should be considered when making the
method selection. In this process the available input data will also restrict the choice in the method.
Method 1 provides the most accurate calculation procedure and it relies upon a comprehensive lighting
scheme design as the main input to the energy calculation.
Method 2 provides a quick estimation aimed for pre-design calculations and employs default values.
Default values are provided in Annex B of the standard but these may be substituted by national defined
values for which templates are provided in Annex A in the standard.
Method 3 provides the most accurate energy use for lighting information but can only be used after the
building has been commissioned and occupied. This method can also be linked to the BMS of the
building to provide continuous smart metering.
NOTE For the correct use of this standard the choices between methods will preferably be made according to
the available data and the accuracy required. Default data template is necessary but not enough to guarantee
consistency of the data. The chosen method in particular for the application within the context of EU Directives
may be transposed into national legal requirements.
6 Method 1 – Calculation of the energy required for lighting

6.1 Rationale
Method 1 is a comprehensive method that assumes that for the building a comprehensive lighting
system design has been performed. The lighting system design produced the required lighting scheme
and was based on real data of the specified products. The scheme and product information provides the
input to the lighting energy estimation process. The method is suitable for new or for refurbishment of
existing buildings. For existing buildings the process involves making an audit of the lighting scheme to
establish the installed lighting load.
6.2 Time steps
The time steps for calculations are harmonized across all EPB related standards. In this Technical
Report the time steps are:
Yearly, assuming average 8 760 h.
Monthly, assuming average 730 h.
The provided method for the estimation of the lighting energy demand is based on an annual approach
(see Annex F on day lighting). Seasonal impacts can be regarded by monthly correction factors. Hourly
values cannot be derived in any correct correlation with climatic data. Accurate hourly calculation of
the energy required for lighting is not practical as there is no robust method for the prediction of the
values of the dependency factors. However, Annex P gives an approximate method for the hourly
intervals of estimating the energy required or used by lighting. This method should provide hourly data
for the energy balance of heating and cooling load estimations of the place or building. The only way to
achieve a degree of accuracy in the estimation of daylight supply is by using standard detailed lighting
simulation method referred to in F.8, but this method is not within the scope of the standard and
technical report.
22
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
An alternative and simpler way to, at least formally, link into the hourly calculation scheme of other
parts of the energy balance, such as internal loads for heat load calculation, is by the average hourly
value. The average hourly value may be obtained from the monthly calculated value divided by the
hours in the month. For each month a constant (not variable) term will therefore be added as lighting
energy to the other hourly variable parts of the energy balance.
The reason for this restriction lies in modelling the impact of daylight. This requires a photometrical
correct three dimensional calculation scheme of the light distribution outside entering through the
facades into the adjacent indoor spaces. Early simple approaches have been based on the determination
of the daylight factor (D) at a given inside position and an hourly multiplication with an estimate of the
outside illuminance in order to obtain the indoor natural illumination which can then serve as basis for
estimating the electric lighting needs. As the daylight factor is defined for a CIE overcast sky only (fixed
uncommon outside luminance distribution), multiplication of the daylight factor with general outside
illuminance values as derived from real weather data (including clear, sunny and partially overcast
conditions) led to significant and not tolerable errors. Moreover the daylight factor method does not
allow accounting for any sun shading devices, which are mandatory in today’s rating methods.
Simplified methods to cope on an hourly basis - without the use of photometric algorithms - with the
versatile outside luminance distribution and complex light transmission through façade elements like
different sun-shading systems so far do not exist.
Therefore rating the impact of daylight nowadays has been accounted for in such a way, that monthly
and annual detailed simulation runs with photometrical exact sky and room models have been
performed with lighting simulation software for a representative set of room geometries, sun-shading
devices and locations. From this detailed simulation results, regression models (analytical and tabular)
have been derived, allowing to estimate the annual and monthly impact of daylight penetration through
the façade without the need of using detailed computer tools, with a higher accuracy than the former D
(Daylight Factor) method and allowing to incorporate not only simple glazing systems but also sun-
shading and light redirection devices.
Generally speaking, selecting a calculation step that is smaller than necessary makes application more
complicated than necessary as the occupation profiles and other input parameters needed for hourly
calculation are considerably more detailed. As monthly or even annual balancing methods can be
sufficiently precise for all balancing applications a monthly balancing procedure should be chosen in
order to improve the acceptance and user-friendliness of the standard.
Nevertheless, if deemed necessary the direct usage of detailed lighting simulation software on an hourly
basis is always possible (see F.8) at then of course higher expenses (modelling and calculation time).
No reliable method can be recommended to break down the monthly period values to hourly time steps.
This implies that the overall general hourly method cannot properly represent energy flows in the
building on hourly time steps.
6.3 Assumptions
A comprehensive lighting scheme has been designed including controls with protocols. The scheme
fully meets the lighting requirements specified in the lighting application standards.
6.4 Data input
6.4.1 General
For most new or refurbished buildings it is assumed that the required lighting solution will be
established by performing a comprehensive lighting system design. The lighting design process is not
part of this Technical Report but an overview of the main considerations in the design process is shown
in Figure 1. The lighting design criteria may be obtained from the standards for workplaces in
EN 12464-1, for sport places in EN 12193 and for domestic places in Annex N of this Technical Report.
The completion of the lighting design process will produce the lighting solution, the required lighting
23
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
scheme and the product schedule. The lighting solution will give details of the required luminaire types
and the lighting control system. There may be several types of luminaires in the scheme each
performing specific functions from a specific mounting position. The luminaire types may only be used
for illumination but some may also contain components to provide emergency lighting. The luminaires
usually have embodied components to make them controllable and dimmable by receiving signals from
detectors mounted remotely but powered by the luminaire or they may even be self-managed by inbuilt
detectors. Each luminaire type will have a unique product reference code as described in EN 12665 for
identification provided by the manufacturer.
6.4.2 New or refurbished building lighting system data
The information and data on the type and number of luminaires used in a zone, room or building and
the type of controls is required to form the input data for the estimation procedure of the energy
requirements for lighting. An example of how the lighting system data may be set out is shown in Table
4.
Table 4 — Example schedule of the luminaires in the lighting scheme
Place Luminaire Unique ID Quantity Description of control

type and operation
technique
Reception/Entrance PAL999 ww DALI Dimmable, Daylight
and Occupancy linked
Reception/Entrance PAL999E xx DALI Dimmable, Daylight
and Occupancy linked,
Emergency lighting
facility
Corridor/Ground floor QAL888 yy DALI, Occupancy linked
Corridor/Ground floor QAL888E zz DALI, Occupancy linked,
Emergency lighting
facility
6.4.3 Existing building lighting system data
This method is applied to existing buildings that already have installed lighting systems. In this method
a lighting audit has to be carried out in the building to establish the type and numbers of luminaires
installed and the power rating of each luminaire type. The procedure for making the lighting audit is
described in Annex D and the schedule of luminaires may-be presented as shown in Table 4.
The information and data obtained will form the input to the energy estimation process. Once the
installed lighting load is established the calculation procedure of the lighting energy requirement
described in method 1 can be followed. The output of the method will be as described in 5.1 of the
standard. This method may also be used for buildings that already have lighting controls or where it is
considered or planned to add such controls.
6.4.4 Lighting system product data
For each place and for each luminaire type specified in the lighting scheme the electrical data as shown
in Table 5 needs to be obtained from the manufacturer’s product information sheet or from the lighting
audit. The luminaire circuit power is the total power supplied to the luminaire with the lamps and the
controls operating and charge power supplied to the emergency batteries. The Luminaire controls
standby power and the emergency battery charge power are measured with the lamps in the luminaire
switched off.
24
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table 5 — An example presentation of the required power data for luminaires in a place
Luminaire Unique ID Luminaire circuit power Luminaire controls Luminaire standby

(Pi) [W] standby power (Pci) [W] emergency battery
charge power (Pei) [W]
PAL999 57,2 1,2 0,0
PAL999E 58,0 1,2 0,8
QAL888 27,2 1,2 0,0
QAL888E 28,2 1,2 1,0
For existing buildings during the lighting audit the data gathered can be organized into a similar table as
indicated in Table 5. However, if the luminaire circuit power is not known then the rated power of the
lamp may be used but if the lamp uses ballast or driver the luminaire power should be corrected as
described in Annex D.
6.4.5 Lighting system dependency factors data
In this method the required system design data for each zone, room or building will consist of the
details, dimensions and function of the building or place and the functional characteristics of the
controls and the power ratings of the elements in the electric lighting system. The data will permit the
calculation of the values of the various dependency factors FO, FD and FC for the place. The information
required and the calculation process involved is given in more details in Annexes E, F and G
respectively. The results of the calculations will show the amount of energy saving that can be made by
the use of lighting controls. The details of some typical lighting controls are given Annex K.
NOTE For the occupancy dependency factor FO if a specific application space is not shown within the relevant
part of the table and equivalent space from a different application space may be used. For example when
determining FA for an entrance hall in a manufacturing building using Table E.2 of EN 15193-1:2017 the
information is given within the office application section of the data.
6.5 Operating conditions
The operating conditions are largely determined by the activity in the place, flexibility of the lighting
system and the appropriateness of the lighting controls. To minimize the amount of energy used for
lighting the electric lights should only be operated when there are occupants in the area and when there
is insufficient daylight available to fulfil the required lighting criteria. It is accepted that the electric
lighting system has been designed to provide the full lighting requirements for the area at any time
when daylight is not available. However the electric lights should only be used to top up the available
daylight to the design conditions and only when the area is occupied. For this process to function
correctly a well-designed lighting control system should form an essential part of the lighting solution.
6.6 Calculation information
The calculation of the energy required for lighting involves three basic steps; the estimation of the
installed power for lighting, the estimation of the operating times and the estimation of the energy
saving impact of the lighting controls reacting to occupancy, daylight availability and lighting system
maintenance.
The required steps in the lighting energy calculation method are shown in Figure 3. This shows that the
first step is to establish the building type New or Existing and the second is to assess the lighting
solution. From these data the installed power for lighting and the value of the dependency factors, the
energy for illumination, for standby, the total energy and LENI are calculated.
25
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Figure 3 — Flow diagram for lighting energy calculations
6.7 Expenditure factors for lighting systems
As LENI (Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator), represents the absolute amount of energy required for a
lighting scheme it does not directly provide indications on the efficiency of the lighting technology
employed. The concept of expenditure factors is therefore introduced to complement LENI, intending to
render energy flows in lighting systems more transparent. As the same concept - or with efficiency
factors as ratio of energy need to energy used being the inverted of the expenditure factors - are already
well known for other building systems like heating and cooling, the concept allows for a uniform and
homogeneous rating over all building services systems by differentiating energy need and energy use.
The expenditure factor for lighting systems is composed of partial expenditure factors for the respective
technical installations. This includes the lighting control systems depending on presence of users and
daylight conditions and the electric lighting system. Again, the latter can be broken down into the
partial expenditure factors for light generation, distribution, and delivery. The concept of expenditure
factors does not represent a new or alternative calculation method. Instead it only relates technical
performance parameters of a lighting design to reference values. As it is not possible to assess the
energy demand for lighting in general, it was necessary to define a reference lighting system with
respective reference values.
26
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Figure 4 gives a depiction of the influences (a) on the energy need for lighting Wnd and (b) of the
determination of the expenditure factor for lighting systems by the partial expenditure factors.
Space geometry
Wnd=f(…,room index, …)
Reflection
Wnd=f(…,reflection coefficient, …)
Façade
Wnd=f(…,daylight availability, …)
Usage:
Wnd=f(…, Etask, usage time, absence, …)
a) Depiction of the influences on the energy need for lighting Wnd
Electric lighting eL,ES
⋅
Occupancy dependent control eL, O
⋅
Daylight dependent control eL,D
⋅
Constant illuminance control eL,C
=
Expenditure factor for lighting eL
b) Depiction of the expenditure factor for lighting system el and of the partial
expenditure factors
Figure 4 — Influences on the energy need for lighting and determination of the expenditure
factor for lighting systems
6.7.1 Energy need and energy use for lighting
In general, the notion of energy need describes the energy a consumer receives from an appliance in the
requested form (heat, light, drives, etc.). For lighting it can be described as follows: The energy need for
lighting Wnd is the energy equivalent of the luminous flux that is required for electric space lighting (on
the basis of defined lighting requirements), having been weighted with the effective operating time and
assuming ideal lighting control (ideal use of appropriate potentials like absence, daylight and
compensation for over-dimensioning due to maintenance of the electric lighting system). Whereas the
energy use generally describes the amount of energy to be supplied to the corresponding subsystem.
For lighting it reflects the electrical energy input to a lighting system.
The energy need for lighting Wnd includes all influences, which are not to be attributed to the efficiency
of the lighting technology, such as:
— Usage
27
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
— Requirements pertaining to the visual task: Generally, spaces that have to meet high
requirements with regard to the visual task are characterized by higher values of maintained
illuminance and by higher requirements to the luminance distribution within the space - these
spaces are hence distinguished by higher values of Wnd compared to spaces complying with
less strict requirements. As a consequence, Wnd depends on the requirements for the visual
tasks.
— Usage times: Generally, frequently occupied spaces with long usage times are characterized by
higher values of Wnd (due to the longer effective operating time of the lighting system)
compared to spaces with shorter usage times. Spaces that are occupied primarily at night
(prevailing night-time usage) will be characterized by higher values of Wnd than comparable
spaces with prevailing day-time usage.
— Relative absence: any long relative absence (i.e. a non-occupied space) will reduce Wnd.
— Maintenance of lighting installations: spaces distinguished by high maintenance factors (e.g.

due to minor, use-related pollution of luminaires and spaces) require less over-dimensioned
new lighting installations; from this, a smaller amount of energy need Wnd will result.
— Space geometry
Due to a relatively higher light absorption of the enclosing surfaces, small compact spaces will need
higher luminous fluxes to fulfil the requirements on indoor space illuminances and luminances, which is
why they have higher values of Wnd than large, wide rooms.
— Reflection coefficients of space enclosing surfaces
Dark spaces require higher luminous fluxes to meet the requirements on indoor space illuminances and
luminances, therefore they are characterized by higher values of Wnd than spaces enclosed by bright-
coloured surfaces.
— Façade geometry and photometry, location, climate
Spaces that are poorly supplied with daylight cause higher effective operating times (hence, higher
values of Wnd) than spaces benefitting from good daylight supply. The energy use for lighting Wus
corresponds to the calculated amount of an energy carrier (usually electricity) that is needed to cover
the energy need for lighting.
6.7.2 Expenditure factor for lighting
6.7.2.1 General
In general, an expenditure factor describes the ratio between cost (expenditure) and benefit, thus
forming the reciprocal value of a utilization factor. According to the above given definitions, it can be
written:
Wnd =pRef ⋅ [ AD ( t Day ⋅ FD ,Ref ⋅ FO ,Ref ⋅ FC ,Ref + t Night ⋅ FO ,Ref ⋅ FC ,Ref ) (1)
[kWh]
+ AND ( t Day ⋅ FO ,Ref ⋅ FC ,Ref + t Night ⋅ FO ,Ref ⋅ FC ,Ref )]
This amount of energy need will be supplied by the actually installed lighting system, requiring the
following energy input or expenditure, termed energy use Wus:
28
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Wus =p ⋅ [ AD ( t Day ⋅ FD ⋅ FO ⋅ FC + t Night ⋅ FO ⋅ FC ) (2)

[kWh]
+ AND ( t Day ⋅ FO ⋅ FC + t Night ⋅ FO ⋅ FC )]
The expenditure factor for lighting systems is obtained as ratio of the two above given energy demands:
energy use Wus (standard Formula 16)

=eL =
energy need Wnd
As said before, it can be derived by formal separation of the individual influences for constant
illuminance control, for occupancy dependent and daylight dependent lighting control as well as for the
electric lighting system. Each of these influences is described by a partial expenditure factor, whose
multiplication result in the expenditure factor for lighting systems (see standard Formula 17). These
partial factors and their derivation will be described in the following paragraphs. In general, they all
account for the efficiency of the respective component, compared to an ideal system, which is expressed
by a ratio, with the ideal system covered in the denominator.
eL = eL,C ⋅ eL,O ⋅ eL,D ⋅ eL,ES (standard Formula 17)
6.7.2.2 Partial expenditure factor for constant illuminance control eL,C
The partial expenditure factor for constant illuminance control accounts for the efficiency of the
constant illuminance control and depends on the maintenance factor. It is calculated by the following
formula:
1
1 − FCC (1 − MF )
eL ,C = 2 (standard Formula 18)
1
1 − (1 − MF )
2
where
FCC is the factor for the efficiency of the constant illuminance control.
NOTE The impact of the over-design of schemes (for example modular spacing) is under consideration.
An ideal constant illuminance control with FCC = 1 will dim the light exactly at the maintained
illuminance, thus resulting in a partial expenditure factor of eL,C = 1. The absence of constant
illuminance control, i.e. FCC = 0 will result in the undimmed operation of the system, thus requiring
higher energy inputs. Assuming a maintenance factor (MF) of 0,6 and FCC = 0, a partial expenditure
factor eL,C = 1,25 will result; assuming MF = 0,9, the partial expenditure factor will be eL,C = 1,05, and for
the reference-MF of 0,8 it will be eL,C = 1,11.
The dependency of the partial expenditure factor for constant illuminance control is illustrated in
Figure 5. The reference MF given in Annex C of the standard is marked.
29
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Key
X maintenance factor MF
Y eL,C
1 reference maintenance factor
Figure 5 — Illustration of the partial expenditure factor for constant illuminance control eL,C as
a function of the efficiency factor for constant illuminance control FCC and the maintenance
factor MF
6.7.2.3 Partial expenditure factor for occupancy dependent lighting control eL,O
The partial expenditure factor for occupancy dependent lighting control takes the energy saving
potential of occupancy dependent lighting control into account. It is calculated by dividing the
occupancy dependency factor FO, accounting for the type of system and its effect depending on the type
of usage, by the relative presence in the area under consideration (derived by 1 – FA)
FO
eL ,O = (standard Formula 19)
(1 − FA )
An ideal occupancy detection system will fully recognize the absence of persons and switch off the
lights, which will produce a partial expenditure factor equal to 1. Manual switching in response to room
occupancy, for instance in a cellular 1 person office (FA = 0,4 according to Annex E) with manual switch
(FO = 0,8) will result in an expenditure factor of eL,C = 1,33. If an automatic presence detection system
with FOC = 0,9 (FO = 0,7) was installed in the same type of space this would result in a partial
expenditure factor of eL,C = 1,17
Figure 6 illustrates the dependency of the partial expenditure factor for occupation control. The
normative values for FOC as specified in Annex E have been marked.
30
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Key
X FOC
Y eL,O
1 manual on/ auto off

2 auto off/ auto on
3 manual switch
Figure 6 — Illustration of the partial expenditure factor for occupancy dependent lighting
control eL,O as a function of the controls function factor FOC and the absence factor FA
6.7.2.4 Partial expenditure factor for daylight dependent lighting control eL,D
The partial expenditure factor for daylight dependent lighting control correlates the effect of the actual
control system to the ideal case. The formula (standard Formula 20) also accounts for the fact that this
control system does neither affect the lighting energy demand in areas not benefitting from daylight nor
the one during night time hours.
AD tDay ⋅ (1 − FD,S ⋅ FD,C ) + t Night  + AND ( tDay + t Night )

eL,D = (standard Formula 20)
AD tDay ⋅ (1 − FD,S ) + t Night  + AND ( tDay + t Night )
When applying the standard’s quick method 2, FD,C = 0,52, as manual daylight-responsive control is
assumed (see 7.4.3.5 of the standard, Formula 30).
An ideal daylight control system will use electric lighting to supplement the available amount of
daylight precisely up to the point where the required illuminance is achieved, thus resulting in a partial
expenditure factor of 1. For instance, manual daylight-dependent lighting control in a personal office
with “strong daylight availability” (tD = 2 250 h; tN = 250 h, see Annex B of the standard, Table B.2) and
Em = 500 lx with FD,C = 0,57 (see Annex F of the standard, Table F.16) in a fully daylight-supplied single-
occupant office (i.e. AD = A or AD,normalized = 1) with FD,S = 0,7 will result in an expenditure factor of
31
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
eL,D = 1,73. For automated daylight control (dimmed, stand by losses, no switch-on) with FD,C = 0,8, a
value of eL,D = 1,34 will result under the same boundary conditions. If only half of the room is receiving
daylight (i.e. AD = AND = A/2 or AD,normalized = 0,5), the value for the automated system will be eL,D = 1,09.
The partial expenditure factor for the daylight-dependent control of electric lighting eL,D is illustrated in
Figure 7 for several typical parameter settings.
32
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Space type Normalized Typical Partial expenditure factor for daylight-

(example) area with daylight dependent
daylight supply electric lighting control eL,D
supply
AD,,normalized FD,S eL,D as a function of tDay and FD,C
[-] [-] [-]
Manufacturin 1,0 0,9
g hall with
roof lights
Personal 1,0 0,7

office (single
occupant)
Open floor 0,2 0,7

plan office
Figure 7 — Illustration of the partial expenditure factor for daylight dependent electric lighting
control eL,D as a function of the normalized daytime tDay,normalized
(tDay,normalized + tNight,normalized = 1), the efficiency factor for constant illuminance control
FD,C for different values of the normalized area with daylight supply AD,normalized
(tD,normalized + AND,normalized = 1), and varying daylight supply factors FD,S
33
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
6.7.2.5 Partial expenditure factor for the electric lighting system eL,ES
Corresponding to the other partial expenditure factors, eL,ES is an object-related parameter. On the one
hand, a luminaire will thus imply two different expenditure factors in two different room situations. On
the other hand, this circumstance will also allow to directly compare the energy performance of two
different luminaires in one room situation. This approach is similar to the principle of balance
calculations used in other evaluation areas (heating, cooling, ventilation).
The partial expenditure factor for the electric lighting system correlates the installed electric power
density P with the electrical evaluation power for supplying the luminous flux that is needed to fulfil the
use-related requirements, when applying a reference system defined for this purpose. How to
determine these power densities and the resulting factor, respectively, depends on the calculation
method applied. The determination according to the following three different approaches will be
introduced in the following:
a) Comprehensive calculation method 1 of the standard
b) Simplified utilization factor method (introduced in this Technical Report)
c) Quick calculation method 2 of the standard (derived from the simplified utilization factor method)
As all approaches rely on the definition of a reference light source, this will be introduced next.
Reference light source: luminous efficacy and luminous intensity distribution
For the determination of expenditure factors, it is necessary to define a reference light source.
Analysing the composition of a light source’s optical radiation spectrum, the luminous efficacy ηL, the
(most similar/close) colour temperature T and the general colour rendering index Ra can be clearly
determined. Theoretically, the target function of an ideal light source should ensure the highest possible
luminous efficacy (ηL = 683 lm/W), the highest possible colour rendering index (Ra = 100) and the
independence of the light colour. Physically, such a light source cannot be realized.
Based on the assumptions that fluorescent lamps and discharge lamps can be considered to be fully
developed and technically mature and LEDs are expected to become an important light source in future
and to be further developed, a reference luminous efficacy of 140 lm/W was chosen. This is estimated
to be a realistic, feasible value for LEDs. Further, there is also a relation to natural lighting using
daylight. For clear skies, the luminous efficacy of radiation can be found to take on values in this range.
The value of 140 lm/W was determined being well aware of the fact that by this convention expenditure
factors < 1 might occur in selected illumination solutions using specialized lamps (like sodium-vapour
lamps).
A reference luminous intensity distribution should meet the lighting requirements in accordance with
standard EN 12464-1or EN 12193 in an ideal way with regard to energy performance. As such a
luminous intensity distribution curve (I-table) cannot be specified independent of a certain object, it is
only possible to make an agreement concerning a real I-table that meets the requirements in good
approximation and which should be used as a reference.
In general, the requirements concerning the use of energy can be fulfilled most efficiently by using
direct lighting systems. For horizontal work planes as well as regarding further requirements, e.g.
concerning the cylindrical illuminance inside the space, the highest room utilization factors will result
for light distribution A50. This type is thus applied as reference luminous intensity distribution. Since
luminous intensity distributions (I-table) also vary within one class, exactly one distribution of the type
will be selected to satisfy the required uniqueness.
34
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
a) Determination of eL,ES when applying the standard’s method 1 (comprehensive calculation)
Within method 1, the installed power and resulting therefrom the installed power density is derived by
simulation of the lighting situation, during the comprehensive lighting system design. In consequence,
the power density of the reference lighting system needs to be calculated accordingly. This means, a
respective lighting situation with the reference light source as defined above in the area under
consideration needs to be computed.
b) Determination of eL,ES when applying the simplified utilization factor method
The power densities and thus the partial expenditure factor for the electric lighting system can be
determined from the luminous efficacy, the energy expenditure factor of the lamp operating device and
the light output ratio (luminaire efficiency) as well as the room utilization factor, as demonstrated in the
following Formula 21 of the standard. These parameters are generally available. The formula can be
further rearranged corresponding to the influences of delivery, distribution and generation of electric
light. Consequently also the partial expenditure factor can be derived by formal separation of these
different effects, for which partial expenditure factors (eL,ES,del, eL,ES,dis, eL,ES,gen ) were introduced
Φ
1
FU ,e ⋅η LB ,Ref ⋅η L ,Ref ⋅
P f B ,ref
e= =
L,ES
PRef Φ
1 (standard Formula 21)
FU ⋅η LB ⋅η L ⋅
fB
F η LB ,Ref η L ,Ref ⋅ f B
= U ,e ⋅ ⋅ =eL,ES,del ⋅ eL, ES, dis ⋅ eL,ES,gen
FU η LB η L ⋅ f B ,ref
Partial expenditure factor for delivery of electric light
The partial expenditure factor for delivery of electric light describes the emission of the luminous flux
emitted from luminaires to the inside of the space (work plane). It establishes an object-specific relation
(i.e. taking into account the space geometry and the respective space reflection coefficients) between
the actual room utilization factor for the luminous intensity distribution of the selected luminaire and
for a reference luminous intensity distribution. It is calculated using Formula (23) of the standard:
FU,e
eL,ES,del = (standard Formula 23)
FU
For rectangular rooms, the utilization factor FU can simplified be determined as a function of the room
index and upward flux fraction (UFF) using Table 6. This table also includes the reference utilization
factor , which represents the values of a direct A50-system with UFF=0 %.
35
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table 6— Utilization factors (actual and reference) as a function of the room index k and the
upward flux fraction
Upward flux Room index k

fraction (UFF) 0,6 0,8 1 1,25 1,5 2 2,5 3 4 5
10 % (direct) 0,45 0,52 0,56 0,62 0,64 0,69 0,72 0,76 0,79 0,79
30 % (dir./ind.) 0,39 0,44 0,48 0,51 0,54 0,57 0,60 0,62 0,64 0,67
70 % (ind./dir.) 0,26 0,31 0,36 0,41 0,45 0,51 0,56 0,57 0,64 0,67
90 % (indirect) 0,19 0,24 0,28 0,33 0,36 0,43 0,48 0,52 0,57 0,62
Reference case
0,50 0,61 0,69 0,78 0,84 0,90 0,95 0,99 1,03 1,05
(UFF=0 %) FU,e
NOTE Intermediate values of the room index can be interpolated.
For the determination of the values given in the table the following typical reflection coefficients were
applied: ceiling: 70 %, walls: 50 %, floor: 20 %.
Partial expenditure factor for distribution of electric light
The partial expenditure factor for distribution of electric light relates the actual luminaire efficiency to
the ideal luminaire efficiency (ηLB,Ref = ηLB,ideal = 1). It thus describes the luminaires‘ light distribution
efficiency, i.e. the distribution efficiency of the light emitted from the lamps through the luminaires. In
consequence, this factor is equivalent to the reciprocal of the luminaire light output ratio ηLB.
Partial expenditure factor for generation of electric light
The partial expenditure factor for generation of electric light relates the actual luminous efficacy and
the efficiency of the light source’s operating device to a reference luminous efficacy and an ideal
operation of the light sources (fB,Ref = fB,ideal = 1). Information on the reference light source are given
below.
c) Determination of eL,ES when applying the standard’s method 2 (quick calculation)
Like the calculation procedure of method 2 is derived from the simplified utilization factor method, this
also applies for the determination of the partial expenditure factor for the electric lighting system.
Applying the formulation of the installed power, according to the simplified method from Annex C, the
standard Formula (23) can be rearranged and simplified as shown below, when the design influences of
the maintained illuminance, the maintenance factor and the surrounding area are regarded to be equal
in both cases (reference and actual situation). In addition, the ratio of the power density values can be
replaced by the above given quotient of the utilization factors, which depends on the room index.
P Pj⋅lx ⋅ Etask ⋅ FMF ⋅ FCA ⋅ FL Pj⋅lx ⋅ FL

e=
L,ES = = =
PRef Pj⋅lx ,Ref ⋅ Etask ⋅ FMF ⋅ FCA ⋅ FL ,Ref Pj⋅lx ,Ref ⋅ FL ,Ref
(3)
Pj⋅lx FU ,e
= 2,33 =⋅ FL 2,33 ⋅ FL
Pj⋅lx ,Ref FU
With
60lm / W 3 1
FL ,Ref= = =
140lm / W 7 2,33
36
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
6.7.3 Application of expenditure factors
6.7.3.1 General
Besides rating the efficiency of the lighting situation, the application of expenditure factors allow an
easy and at the same time very meaningful comparison of old and new systems. In offices, for instance,
the expenditure factors for common electric lighting systems vary between values close to 2 for efficient
(newly installed) lighting systems and frequently > 6 for old installations. If new systems are provided
with appropriate light management systems, overall expenditure factors between 2 and 3 will result,
while manually operated lighting systems will produce factors close to 7. For existing systems, which
are rarely equipped with light management components, even expenditure factors >10 may result.
Figure 8 presents an example of the energy flow density defined on the basis of expenditure factors for
a personal office lit by an existing system. In Figure 9 an old and a new system are compared.
Figure 8 — Example of the energy flows in a single-occupant office with an existing lighting
system
37
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Figure 9 — Comparable example of the energy flows in a single-occupant office with a new and
an old system
6.7.3.2 Example calculation of expenditure factors for lighting systems
In the following, example calculations for several cases are presented. In a first step, seven different
space types will be defined and parameterized. Then, the partial expenditure factors for the electric
lighting system will be determined for various system configurations used in practice. As considered
most illustrating, this will be done according to the determination of eL,ES following method b, applying
the simplified utilization factor method. Lastly, the associated energy need, the expenditure factor, and
the energy use for lighting will be determined and discussed for the typical variations of the space
types, the electric lighting systems, and the lighting control solutions.
6.7.3.3 Space types under consideration
The seven typical space geometries under consideration are presented in Figure 10. The parameter
settings of the respective spaces are given in Table 7.
38
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
a) Circulation area b)Personal office (single occupant) c) Conference room
d) Open floor office/ f) Manufacturing hall with roof g) Manufacturing hall without roof
e) Kitchen in non-residential buildings lights lights
NOTE The areas benefitting from daylight are shown in dark grey.
Figure 10 — Typical spaces under consideration
39
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table 7 — Parameter setting of the seven considered space types
Area of floor space illuminated by daylight
Night-time usage hours per annum tNight

Daylight supply factor in daylit area FD,S
Day-time usage hours per annum tDay

for illumination type
Room index ka
Maintained illuminance Em
Maintenance factor MF
Dimensions a × b × h
Relative. absence FA
Floor space
dir/indb
dir
AD
No. Space type [m] × [m] × [m] [m²] [-] [-] [m²] [%] [h] [h] [-] [lx] [-]
1 Circulation area 1,8 × 24,8 × 2,8 44,6 0,6 0,80 12,2 72,8 2250 250 0,8 100 0,8
2 Personal office (single occupant) 3,6 × 4,5 × 2,8 16,2 1,0 1,30 16,2 75,8 2250 250 0,4 500 0,8
3 Conference room 9 × 7,2 × 2,8 64,8 2,0 2,67 39,9 76,3 2250 250 0,5 500 0,8
4 Open floor office 16 × 16 × 2,8 256 4,0 5,30 76,0 76,7 2250 250 0 500 0,8
5 Kitchen in non-residential buildings 16 × 16 × 2,8 256 4,0 5,30 76,0 76,7 1250 1250 0 500 0,8
6 Manufacturing hall with roof lights 32 × 32 × 8,8 1024 2,0 - 1024 94 2500 1500 0 500 0,7
7 Manufacturing hall without roof lights 32 × 32 × 8,8 1024 2,0 - 0 0 2500 1500 0 500 0,7
The assumed reflection coefficients (ρ) are floor = 20 %; wall = 50 %; ceiling = 70 %.
a Assumed height of task area: 0,8 m

b Height of luminaire plane: 2,5 m
40
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
6.7.3.4 Partial expenditure factors for the electric lighting system
Example partial expenditure factors for different configurations of electric lighting systems will be
given in Table 8, matching the spaces considered in Figure 10 and Table 7. Table 9 specifies the
associated values of installed power Pref and P. For a lighting system featuring an ideal (by definition)
energy performance with a reference luminous efficacy ηL,ref = 140 lm/W, lossless ballast fB = 1 and a
lossless light distribution through the luminaire of ηLB,ref = 1, a partial expenditure factor of eL,ES = 1,0
will result. For commonly used electric lighting systems, example values are ranging between 2,2 and
3,3. The example value given for the floor area is 4,3., which is due to the lower luminous efficacy of
compact fluorescent lamps compared to that of customary tubular lamps generally used in offices. By
replacing sodium vapour lamps (ηL = 180 lm/W) in industrial areas (which have only minor or zero
requirements regarding the general colour rendering index), an expenditure factor of el,K = 1,4 will be
determined. Halls equipped with metal-halide vapour lamps have typical partial expenditure factors of
el,K = 2,6. Regarding existing office lighting systems, an old system with T12-lamps, CB, luminaires with
inefficient reflectors and an assumed value of ηLB = 0,5 will have partial expenditure factors of el,K =
6,5. With this, the existing system exceeds by factor 2,5 the value of an energy-efficient new
installation for the same type of usage. When comparing an existing halogen-lamp system for
manufacturing hall and corridor lighting (space type: floor area) with a common-type new installation,
the difference in energy efficiency will be approximately equal to factor 4.
41
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table 8 — Examples of expenditure factors for the electric lighting system

Lamp Ballast Luminaire Partial expenditure factors
Light
Upward Flux
Output
Illumination solution ηL fB Fraction eL,ES,del eL,ES,dis eL,ES,gen eL,ES
Ratio
(UFF)
ηLB
[lm/W] [-] [-] [-] [-] [-] [-] [-]
Ideal energy system 140 1,0 1,00 0 % (A50) 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0
Standard, direct 50 (CFL) 1,1 (EB) 0,80 10 % 1,11 1,25 3,08 4,27
Circulation area
Existing, direct 15 (halogen) 1,1 (transformer) 0,70 10 % 1,11 1,43 10,27 16,28
Efficient, direct 100 (T5) 1,1 (EB) 0,85 10 % 1,24 1,18 1,54 2,25
Efficient, dir / ind 100 (T5) 1,1 (EB) 0,90 30 % 1,54 1,11 1,54 2,64
Standard, direct 90 (T5) 1,1 (EB) 0,70 10 % 1,24 1,43 1,71 3,03
Personal office
Standard, dir / ind 90 (T5) 1,1 (EB) 0,80 30 % 1,54 1,25 1,71 3,29
Existing, direct 70 (T12) 1,3 (CB) 0,50 10 % 1,24 2,00 2,60 6,45
Existing,
70 (T12) 1,3 (CB) 0,50 30 % 1,54 2,00 2,60 8,01
direct/indirect
Conference
Efficient, dir / ind 100 (T5) 1,1 (EB) 0,90 30 % 1,60 1,11 1,54 2,74
room
Open floor Efficient, dir / ind 100 (T5) 1,1 (EB) 0,90 30 % 1,58 1,11 1,54 2,70
office Existing, direct 70 (T12) 1,3 (CB) 0,50 10 % 1,30 2,00 2,60 6,76
Kitchen Efficient, direct 100 (T5) 1,1 (EB) 0,85 10 % 1,30 1,18 1,54 2,36
(non-
10 %
residential Existing, direct 70 (T12) 1,3 (CB) 0,50 1,30 2,00 2,60 6,76
building)
Efficient, direct I 180 (SON) 1,1 (CB) 0,80 10 % 1,30 1,25 0,86 1,39
Efficient, direct II 96 (HMI) 1,1 (CB) 0,80 10 % 1,30 1,25 1,60 2,61
Manufacturing
hall Efficient, direct III 100 (T5) 1,1 (EB) 0,85 10 % 1,30 1,25 1,54 2,50
Existing, direct 70 (T12) 1,3 (CB) 0,50 10 % 1,30 2,00 2,60 6,76
42
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table 9 — Examples of partial expenditure factors for the lighting system and installed power
Installed
power for Partial Installed power of the
determining expenditure actually installed
the energy Illumination factor system
Space type
need solution
Pref eL,ES P
[W/m²] [-] [W/m²]
Circulation Standard, direct 4,27 7,74

1,81
area Existing, direct 16,28 29,47
Efficient, direct 2,25 12,18
Efficient, dir / ind 2,64 14,28
Standard, direct 3,03 16,43
Personal office 5,42 Standard, dir / ind 3,29 17,85
Existing, direct 6,45 34,95
Existing, direct /
8,01 43,40
indirect
Conference
4,52 Efficient, dir / ind 2,74 12,37
room
Open floor Efficient, dir / ind 2,70 10,73

3,97
office Existing, direct 6,76 26,84
Kitchen Efficient, direct 2,36 11,54
(non-residentia 4,90
l building) Existing, direct 6,76 33,12
Efficient, direct I 1,39 7,09
Manufacturing Efficient, direct II 2,61 13,29

5,10
hall Efficient, direct III 2,50 12,76
Existing, direct 6,76 34,48
6.7.3.5 Sample expenditure factors for lighting systems
Amongst others, Table 10 depicts the determined energy need values. They range between
Wnd = 0,6 kWh/m²y (floor area) and Wnd = 16,6 kWh/m²y (industrial halls). The low amount of energy
need determined for the floor area is basically due to the relatively low maintained illuminance of
Em = 100 lx and the high relative absence of FA = 0,8. The high value obtained for the industrial hall
without rooflights results from the relative maintained illuminance of Em = 500 lx and the low relative
absence of FA = 0 in conjunction with a high number of annual usage hours. In both cases, daylight
supply is not sufficient, as either not represented or the area which is illuminated by daylight is rather
small in relation to the floor area of the respective space type. By contrast, the pronounced influence
daylight supply has on the energy need becomes quite clear on comparing variation #6 (hall with roof
lights) with an energy need value of Wnd = 0,6 kWh/m²y and variation #7 (hall without roof lights)
with Wnd = 16,6 kWh/m²y. The energy need values of the other space types given are to interpret
accordingly.
43
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Using efficient new installations with automatic illumination control systems expenditure factors of
approximately 1,8 to 2,8 can be realized. For instance, if lighting control systems are not used in
offices that are equipped with efficient luminaire technology, the expenditure factor will rise to values
between 2,7 and 6,3, depending on the energy need of the space type. Example calculations for an
existing personal office lighting system result in an expenditure factor of approximately 15, thus
requiring an energy input that is about 6 times as much as that of an energy-efficient new lighting
system. In the case of the described open-plan office, the difference between an efficient new lighting
installation with direct/ indirect lighting and an old system with direct lighting is approximately 2,7.
The energy use Wus is then obtained by multiplying the energy need Wnd and the expenditure factor.
The calculated example final energies range between 1,6 kWh/m²y (variation #1.a.I: floor area,
standard – direct with automatic lighting control) and 59,8 kWh/m²y (variation #7.d.I: hall without
roof lights, existing - direct with manual lighting control).
44
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table 10 — Energy needs, expenditure factors and energy uses for illumination for the spaces und lighting installations under
consideration
Partial Illumination control Expenditur

Energy Electric Energy
expenditure e factor for
need lighting system Partial expenditure factors use
factor lighting
No. Space type
Wnd eL,ES Type eL,O eL,D eL,C EL Wus
[kWh/m²y Type
[-] [-] [-] [-] [-] [kWh/m²y]
]
I Automatic 1,50 1,04 1,00 6,67 4,31
a Standard, direct 4,27
1 II Circulation area 0,6 Manual 2,00 1,11 1,11 10,54 6,81
b I Existing, direct 16,28 Manual 2,00 1,11 1,11 40,16 25,94
I Automatic 1,17 1,43 1,00 3,76 6,00
a Efficient, direct 2,25
II Manual 1,33 2,07 1,11 6,87 10,97
I Efficient, Automatic 1,17 1,43 1,00 4,41 7,04
b 2,64
II dir/ind Manual 1,33 2,07 1,11 8,06 12,86
2 c I Personal office 1,6 Standard, direct 3,03 Manual 1,33 2,07 1,11 9,27 14,80
Standard,
d I Manual
dir/ind 3,29 1,33 2,07 1,11 10,08 16,08
e I Existing, direct 6,45 Manual 1,33 2,07 1,11 19,72 31,47
Existing,
f I Manual
direct/indirect 8,01 1,33 2,07 1,11 24,50 39,09
I Conference Efficient, Automatic 1,20 1,15 1,00 3,78 9,91
3 a 2,6 2,74
II room dir/ind Manual 1,40 1,37 1,11 5,83 15,30
I Efficient, Automatic 1,00 1,05 1,00 2,84 19,43
a 2,70
Open floor dir/ind
4 II 6,8 Manual 1,00 1,13 1,11 3,39 23,23
office
45
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Partial Illumination control Expenditur

Energy Electric Energy
expenditure e factor for
need lighting system Partial expenditure factors use
factor lighting
No. Space type
Wnd eL,ES Type eL,O eL,D eL,C EL Wus
[kWh/m²y Type
[-] [-] [-] [-] [-] [kWh/m²y]
]
I Automatic 1,13 1,03 1,00 2,74 18,66
a Kitchen Efficient, direct 2,36
5 II (non-residentia 6,8 Manual 1,25 1,06 1,11 3,47 23,60
l building)
a I SON, direct I 1,39 Manual 1,00 1,71 1,18 2,80 1,75
b I Manufacturing HMI, direct II 2,61 Manual 1,00 1,71 1,18 5,24 3,29
6 hall with roof 0,6
c I lights T16, direct III 2,50 Automatic 1,00 1,28 1,00 3,20 2,01
d I Existing, direct 6,76 Manual 1,00 1,71 1,18 13,60 8,53
a I SON, direct I 1,39 Manual 1,00 1,00 1,18 1,64 27,17
b I Manufacturing HMI, direct II 2,61 Manual 1,00 1,00 1,18 3,07 50,94
7 hall without 16,6
c I roof lights T16, direct III 2,50 automatic 1,00 1,00 1,00 2,50 41,57
d I Existing, direct 6,76 manual 1,00 1,00 1,18 7,95 132,10
46
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
6.7.4 Approach to expenditure factors for lighting systems
The systematic evaluation approach below is intended to enhance the understanding of the concept of
expenditure factors regarding the introduction and application in practice.
Distinction of the evaluation systematics with regard to calculation procedures
The expenditure factor for lighting correlates the parameters that were determined using calculation
procedures to determine the energy need for lighting. Hence, it has no influence on the formal
calculation of the energy need for lighting. The application of this systematic evaluation approach
enables planners to perform a quick analysis and (if necessary) optimization of the energy flows (or of
the required energy input) in the lighting sector, separately for the various technical components of
lighting systems.
Scope of evaluation
As illustrated in Figure 4, building-specific influences (like architectural design and boundary
conditions for use) are described by means of equal utilization factors (space geometry, space
reflectance), daylight availability (facade design, climate, location); requirements pertaining to the
visual task, times of usage, relative absence, and the influence of usage on the maintenance of lighting
systems are considered both when determining the energy reference value (net energy) and the
planned energy target value (delivered energy). In this way they compensate each other and are thus
not eligible for evaluations which use the expenditure factor. Different technologies, however, can be
directly compared with each other by comparing the expenditure factors. In this way, the partial
expenditure factors eL,ES, eL,O, eL,D and eL,C (see Figure 4), only describe how efficiently the technical
systems actually utilize the given potential, which is expressed by the net energy. They do not provide
any information about the technical quality of a lighting system or its impact in the respective room.
The amount of net energy itself (and with this, the amount of delivered energy that is coupled to this)
can be influenced and optimized at least partially, for instance by designing the room reflectance or
room geometries that are appropriate under aspects of lighting.
Absolute values of expenditure factors and comparison to other technical building systems
Due to the required conventions underlying the energy evaluation of light and lighting (reference
luminous efficacy and reference luminous intensity distribution) absolute values for expenditure
factors are obtained, which are specific to lighting and cannot be directly compared with other
technical building services. Investigations of different zones of buildings and technical lighting
equipment found expenditure factors to range between 1,6 and 40,2 (see Table 10). It should be noted
here that real expenditure factors at present can hardly ever approach a value of eL,ES = 1, on account of
the convention of ηL = 140 lm/W. This situation may however soon change due to the still rapidly
rising efficiency of LED lamps. The dynamic development regarding the values of expenditure factors
and with this the energy efficiency of lighting technologies are subject to strong variations.
For comparison: in the sector of heating technology, expenditure factors are generally lower and they
are characterized by a less dynamic development regarding the values. For typical constellations using
radiators as heat emission systems, at a given ratio of flow/ return temperature of 55 °C / 45 °C, the
following values result:
— Heat generation by condensing boiler: values of approximately 1,4,
— By an electric ground-to-water heat pump or by CHP district heat: values of 0,9.
— Expenditure factors < 1 can be achieved e.g. due to use of efficient heat pumps.
Comparison with established efficiency figures in the lighting sector

In the sector of general lighting, energy efficiency has often been evaluated merely on the basis of the
installed power per unit area of electric lighting PInst [W/m²], due to the practical concentration on
planning electric installations, exclusively.
47
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
The installed power PInst is an absolute value, not a relative one. It has therefore no specific point of
reference. Expert knowledge is required to be able to assign an installed power of 14 W/m² for the
'office' type of use. It cannot be related to the technically achievable level/standard. By contrast, a
relative characteristic (for instance an expenditure factor of eL,ES = 1,6) directly indicates that the
requirements on the lighting situation will be fulfilled by a lighting system, which exceeds by 60 % the
energy demand of a system with optimum energy performance.
The energy need is determined by determining the effective operating time teff and weighting with the
installed power. teff includes the impact of lighting control, but does not indicate these separately.
Thanks to the expenditure factor, the energy impact of lighting control under building-specific
conditions now becomes immediately visible.
6.7.5 Expenditure factors for lighting systems calculation
The concept of expenditure factors is described in 6.7. Regarding this quick calculation method 2, the
following simplifications can be derived for the partial expenditure factor for constant illuminance
control eL,C and the partial expenditure factor for daylight dependent lighting control eL,D, based on the
simplifications described in 6.7.2.4:
— Simplified derivation of the partial expenditure factor for constant illuminance control eL,C:
1
eL ,C =
1 with no constant illuminance control (4)
1− (1 − MF )
2
eL ,C = 1 with constant illuminance control (5)
— Simplified derivation of the partial expenditure factor for daylight dependent lighting control eL,D:
AD tDay ⋅ (1 − FD,S ⋅ 0,52 ) + t Night  + AND ( tDay + t Night )

eL,D = (6)
AD tDay ⋅ (1 − FD,S ) + t Night  + AND ( tDay + t Night )
The calculation of the partial expenditure factor for the electric lighting system eL,ES, follows method c),
as given in 6.5 in the standard.
7 Method 2 – Quick calculation of the energy required for lighting

7.1 Rationale
This method is quick and simple as it employs approximation procedures for the calculation of the
required installed load and uses default data for the impact assessment of the lighting controls. The
output of the method will be as in 5.2.1 of the standard but gives budget estimated values that in
general are likely to be higher than those obtained from the comprehensive design process. The
method is particularly useful for new and refurbishment buildings during concept design and
feasibility study stage. The energy requirement values should be recalculated with real data when the
comprehensive lighting system design has been completed.
7.2 Time steps
Yearly - Taken as 8 760 h.

7.3 Assumptions
Intended lighting solution/system has been identified.
48
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
7.4 Data input
Building type, Area type and dimensions, Luminaire type and its UFF, Maintained illuminance, Light
source type, Task area dimensions, Method of daylight admittance, Daylight factor, Maintenance factor.
7.5 Simplified input
Default data for input are provided in the tables of Annex B of the standard.
7.6.1 General
The required steps in the lighting energy calculation in this quick method are shown in Figure 11. This
shows that the first step is to establish the building type New or Existing and the second is to estimate
the required installed power for lighting followed by the selection and calculation of the dependency
factors value, and finish with the calculation of LENI and the yearly energy required for lighting. As the
energy values are preliminary the method recommends a recalculation of the energy requirements
after a comprehensive lighting design has been completed on the project.
Figure 11 — Flow diagram for quick method of lighting energy calculation
7.6.2 Calculation of installed power for illumination
For non-domestic new or refurbished buildings at the conceptual stage of the design, the budget
installed power Pn required for electric lighting for an area may be estimated by the procedure
described in Annex C. The final installed power should be re-calculated by using the comprehensive
lighting system design process.
For domestic buildings the default installed power load values for various places is given in Annex B of
the standard.
49
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
7.6.3 Calculation of installed power for standby system
For the required standby energy default data for battery charging of emergency luminaires (Wpe) and
for standby energy for automatic lighting controls (Wpc) default values are provided in Annex B of the
standard.
7.6.4 Occupancy dependency factor (FO)
Default values for FO can be obtained in Annex B of the standard.

7.6.5 Daylight supply dependency factor (FD) calculation
As described in 6.4.3.5 of the standard the daylight supply dependency factor FD takes into account the
effect of daylight on the energy required for lighting, by use of the daylight supply factor (FD,S) and the
daylight dependent control factor (FD,C). A simplified procedure for calculation is described in Annex F.
For the quick calculation method 2, this procedure was further simplified, by making certain
assumptions. Thus, an estimation of the daylight supply dependency factor FD could be derived,
representing a simplified, limited parameterization within method 1. In consequence, the
determination of FD within method 2 represents a subset of that within method 1, as depicted in
Figure 12.
Figure 12 — Systematic illustration where method 1 (circle 1) calculates the total daylight
availability and method 2 (circle 2) calculates a subset of the daylight obtained in method 1
The simplified quick calculation of FD within method 2 was derived with the following assumptions
and boundary conditions, as described in more detail in the following paragraphs:
— Zone based model;
— Segregation of areas benefitting from daylight and not benefitting daylight, according to the
approach given in F.2;
— Only annual values, no breakdown on monthly level;
— One representative climate of central Europe (Frankfurt/Germany);
— Separate approaches for side lit and roof lit spaces (7.4.3.5.1 and 7.4.3.5.2 of the standard);
— Controls: “Manual” according to Table F.16 of the standard;
— Solar Shading: “glare protection only” (Solution 1, Table F.7 of the standard).
7.6.5.1 Vertical facades
The quick method for estimating FD for vertical facades was determined by making the following
assumptions and in consequence applying the following values to the method given in Annex F:
Assuming a transmittance of the external layer of glazing of the façade (τSh,GDF,D65) of 0,7, a reduction
factor for frames and subdivisions in the double-glazed façade (kSh,GDF,1) of 0,7, a reduction factor for
50
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
pollution of the glazing (kSh,GDF,2) of 0,9 and a reduction factor for non-vertical light incidence (kSh,GDF,2)
of 0,85, the correction factor for glazed double facades (ISh,GDF) was determined to 0,375. Being
multiplied by an assumed overall correction factor for obstruction/overhang (linear, horizontal,
vertical) of 0,9, this led to a simplified generalized shading index of 0,34 and the following simplified
formula for the daylight factor of the raw building carcass opening:
D = 0,34 (4,13 + 20 ITr,j – 1,36 IRD) (standard Formula 25)
Furthermore, a representative central Europe climate was chosen with Frankfurt/Germany (latitude:
50°, Hdir/Hglob: 0,4). In addition, as the south façade leads to conservative results, it was regarded to
serve as representative orientation. With the additional assumption of a maintained illuminance of
500 lx, this led to a reduced table for determination of the daylight supply factor for sun shading not
activated FD,S,SNA,j as a function of the daylight factor D. This data is given in Table 11.
Table 11 — Values for FD,S,SNA for various daylight factors (D)
D [%] 0,13 0,5 1,0 1,5 2,0 3,0 5,0 8,0 12,0 18,0
FD,S,SNA [%] 12,1 36,1 49,6 63,5 66,4 75,2 81,1 87,7 90,8 91,4
Being applied to the representative south façade, the relative times thereof could be taken from Table
F.3 of the standard Annex F, resulting in trel,D,SNA of 0,65 (for a latitude of 50° and a ratio Hdir/Hglob of
0,4) and trel,D,SA of 0,35, respectively.
Assuming a “medium” daylight availability classification and a shading system characterized as “glare
protection only”, the respective values for the daylight supply factor for sun shading activated FD,S,SA,j
could be derived from Table F.7 of the standard with 0,2 and 0,75 for facades with and without
shading systems. Being multiplied by trel,D,SA = 0,35, this resulted in 0,07 and 0,25.
NOTE The classifications of daylight availability are given in Table F.1 of the standard.
With the above derived values and the additional assumption, that the derived formula for south-
oriented façades with no shading can by approximation be applied for all other orientations, the
method given in Annex F was reduced to the following simplified formulae. These were derived from
Formula (F.15) of Annex F of the standard.
For south facing facades with shading or glare protection
FD,S = 0,65 FD,S,SNA + 0,07 (standard Formula 28)
For south facing facades without shading or glare protection, or for East/West and North facing
facades
FD,S = 0,65 FD,S,SNA + 0,25 (standard Formula 29)
To finally calculate the daylight supply dependency factor FD, the standard Formula (7) was simplified
by replacing the variable daylight dependent electric lighting control factor FD,C with a fixed value. This
was done by assuming the general existence of a manual daylight-responsive control system, leading
to FD,C = 0,52, taken from Table F.16 of the standard with the previously introduced assumptions of
medium daylight availability and maintained illuminance of 500 lx. This resulted in the following
standard Formula 30:
FD = 1 – 0,52 FD,S (standard Formula 30)
NOTE Where knowledge is available of the specific control system an alternative value of FD,C may be used
from Table F.16 of the standard that more accurately reflects the real control system.
51
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
7.6.5.2 Rooflights
Accordingly, the quick method for estimating FD for rooflights was determined by making the
following assumptions and in consequence applying the following values to the method given in Annex
F:
The standard Formula (F.17) was adapted by assuming an external daylight factor (Da) of 100 %, a
reduction factor for frames and subdivisions of the rooflight glazing (kObl,1) of 0,7, a reduction factor for
pollution of the rooflight glazing (kObl,2) of 0,9 and a reduction factor for non-vertical light incidence
(kObl,3) of 0,85. By multiplication, a combined factor of 0,54 could be derived thereof, leading to the
standard Formula (31).
As additionally rooflights with no variable solar protection are assumed, the application and thus
adaption of Formula (F.18) of the standard is redundant.
DSNA = 0,54 ⋅τ D 65 ⋅
∑A Ca
⋅η R (standard Formula 31)
AD
For the simplified determination of the rooflight utilances ηR as a function of the room index k, Table
F.9 of the standard was reduced, assuming the existence of individual rooflights with the following
geometry parameters: as/bs = 2, hs/bs = 0,25, γw = 60º. These reduced utilance values are given in Table
12.
Table 12 — Values for ηR as function of room index k
k 0,6 0,8 1,0 1,25 1,5 2,0 2,5 3,0 4,0 5,0
ηR 0,4 0,54 0,6 0,69 0,75 0,83 0,88 0,92 0,97 1,00
The classification of daylight availability (Dclass), which is relevant for the subsequent determination of
FD, follows the simplified method of Annex F, Table F.11 in the standard.
For the determination of FD,S as a function of the daylight factor D a simplified table of values shown in
Table 13 can be derived from the standard Table F.14.
Table 13 — Values for FD,S as function for Dclass
Dclass None Low Medium Strong

FD,S 0 0,68 0,85 0,92
As for vertical facades, this was done by choosing Frankfurt in Germany as representative central
European climate. Furthermore, a horizontal roof was assumed as well as a maintained illuminance of
500 lx.
Equally as for vertical facades, for the final determination of FD, the existence of a manual daylight-
responsive control system was assumed. Again, with the above taken assumptions, leading to
FD,C = 0,52 and in consequence to the simplified formulation of the standard’s Formula (9) by (30).
Then
FD = 1 – 0,52 FD,S (standard Formula 30)
NOTE Where knowledge is available of the specific control system an alternative value of FD,C may be used
from Table F.16 of the standard that more accurately reflects the real control system.
7.6.6 Constant illuminance dependency factor (FC)
Default values for Fc for various conditions are provided in Annex B of the standard.
52
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
7.6.6.1 Calculation of the energy requirement
The Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator (LENI) for the building is calculated by using Formula (32) of
the standard. The method makes use of normalized annual required power or energy values to the
useful floor area (A) of the building.
LENI = {FC × (Pj / 1000) × FO [(tD × FD) + tN]} + 1 + 1,5 [kWh / (m2 year)] (standard Formula 32) 1
where
LENI is the Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator [kWh / m² year]. The value is also known as the
"normalized annual energy demand for lighting" WL [kWh / m² year].
Fc is constant illuminance factor
Pj is the power density of the area [W/m²]
Fo is the occupancy dependency factor
tD is daylight time [h]
FD is the daylight dependency factor
tN is the daylight absence time [h]
ty is 8 760 h [h]
NOTE The default values maybe replaced by national values if these are available in Annex NA or Annex NB.
The annual energy required for electric lighting within the building is calculated by Formula (15) from
the standard.
W = LENI × A [kWh/m² year] (standard Formula 15)
where
W is the annual energy [kWh]
A is the useful floor area within the building [m2]
See 6.7.
8 Method 3 – Metered energy used for lighting

8.1 Rationale
This method relies on the direct measurement of the energy used for lighting in buildings. It is ideal for
buildings where segregated lighting power circuits exist and separate energy metering has been
installed. This method gives true values of the energy used for lighting at any intervals and the annual
value may also be used to calculate the LENI for the building. This method is recommended for use to
verify the values obtained by calculations and to continuously monitor the energy used for lighting. It
may also be used where a building management system allows energy use for lighting to be measured
8.2 Time steps
The energy is measured in real time intervals according to requirements.
1 In this formula, "LENIsub for area" is replaced by "LENI for the building area"
53
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
The time step of the output may be:

— yearly
— monthly
— hourly
8.3 Assumptions
That only the fixed lighting system in the building is connected to the meter(s). It is important that the
segregated energy meters only record the energy used for lighting in any parts of the building.
8.4 Data input
Energy used readings taken from the electricity meters at required times.
8.5 Simplified input
No additional information beyond the accompanied standard.

8.6.1 General
Key
1 primary power 4 kWh lighting
2 kWh meter other circuits 5 lighting circuit
3 power circuit
Figure 13 — kWh meters on dedicated lighting circuits in the electrical distribution In the
example of Figure 13, the kWh meter for lighting is in parallel to the kWh meter for the rest of
the electrical installation. The consumption for the total building is in this case the sum of both
meters.
W = Wlight metered [kWh/year] (7)
In the example of Figure 14, the kWh meters for lighting distributed over the different floors are
placed in series with the central kWh meter of the building. In this case the central kWh meter
registers the total energy consumption including the lighting consumption.
Formula for monitoring:
W = Wlight metered = ∑all floors (kWh @ date – kWh @ (date – 12 months)) [kWh/year] (8)
Local kWh meter values (as in Figure 14) could be read and totalled by a Building Management
System. No corrections for occupancy or control types are necessary.
54
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Key
1 primary power 4 power circuit 2
2 kWh meter – total power 5 kWh meter – lighting circuit 1
3 power circuit 1 6 kWh meter – lighting circuit 2
Figure 14 — Building with segregation of lighting circuits per floor and separately measured
Key
1 bus line 4 ampere meter
2 230 volt power 5 light controller
3 volt meter 6 luminaires
Figure 15 — Volt and ampere meters coupled to the inputs of the lighting controllers
NOTE 1 Some systems include a power factor meter.
Local power meters coupled to or integrated in the lighting controllers of a lighting management
system. Information on the local consumed energy is made available to a building management
system.
In Figure 15, volt and ampere meters or watt meters are put on the power input of every lighting
controller. The individual lighting controllers calculate the local consumed energy by integrating these
values over time.
These values are made available via the bus line to either the central computer of the lighting system
or the central computer of the building management system. The central computer can process this
information and present the consumed energy figures e.g. per area per month and/or for the total
lighting of the building over a period of 12 months in an exportable format, such as a spread sheet.
Formula for monitoring:
W = Wlight metered = ∑all controllers ∑12 months (kWh local) [kWh/year] (9)
55
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
A lighting management system should log the hours run, the proportionality (dimming level) and
relate this to its internal data base on installed load. The lighting management system can make this
information available to a BMS for further reporting, or it can give the information in an exportable
format.
The lighting controller sums the time per lighting load proportionally per output and makes these
values available via the bus line.
NOTE 2 Energy consumption of luminaires not controlled by the lighting control system is not measured.
NOTE 3 Energy consumption of luminaires indirectly controlled via external contactors is measured.
8.6.2 Calculation procedure of annual energy
The total metered energy used for electric lighting Wmt in the building for time step ts [h] is calculated
by summation of the energy usage reported by each meter and using Formula (35) in the standard.
The meters maybe located in different parts or areas in a building.
Wmt =∑ Wt [kWh/ts] (standard Formula 36)
The annual energy for electric lighting within a building is calculated by using Formula (36) in the
standard.
W = 8 760 / ts × Wmt [kWh/year] (standard Formula 37)
where ts is expressed in hours.

The Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator (LENI) for the building is calculated by using Formula (15) in
the standard:
LENI = W/A [kWh / (m2 year)] (standard Formula 15)
See 6.7.
9 Quality control
9.1 Method 1
The quality of the results depends on the accuracy of the input data and the estimation of the
dependency factors.
The accuracy of the dependency factors should be optimized through the use of the comprehensive
design method. The tolerances of all factors and assumptions used to derive them should be declared.
NOTE The precision of the dependency factors are directly related to the prevailing climate conditions and
human activity in and around the building.
9.2 Method 2
The quality of the results is limited by the accuracy of the assumptions within the input data and the
selection of the default dependency factors for the conditions in the building.
NOTE The precision of the dependency factors are directly related to the variance between the default
assumptions and the true prevailing climate conditions and human activity in and around the building.
9.3 Method 3
The quality of the results depends on the metering circuit integrity and the accuracy of the meter(s).
The energy or power meters used should conform to the requirements for Class C as defined in
EN 50470.
56
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
NOTE The circuit integrity assumes that all relevant luminaires and components are connected to the
measurement meter.
10 Compliance Check
11 Worked out examples

11.1 Method 1
11.1.1 Example 1
Manufacturing building
11.1.1.1 Description
Single storey product manufacturing building with facilities for administration offices,
production/assembly area and material storage area. See Figure 16 for a plan of the building.
Figure 16 — Plan of the manufacturing building
11.1.1.2 Calculation details
Required input information
57
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Office – Size of area, luminaire types and numbers, emergency luminaire types and numbers, control
system, daylight entry with shading, occupancy periods, maintenance schedule.
Factory floor - Size of area, luminaire types and numbers, emergency luminaire types and numbers,
control system, daylight entry with shading, occupancy periods, maintenance schedule.
Entrance area - Size of area, luminaire types and numbers, emergency luminaire types and numbers,
control system, daylight entry with shading, occupancy periods, maintenance schedule.
Toilets - Size of area, luminaire types and numbers, emergency luminaire types and numbers, control
system, daylight entry with shading, occupancy periods, maintenance schedule.
Details of the calculations are given in J.1.1
11.1.2 Example 2
Residential building
A single storey residential bungalow. The premises consisting of a two bedrooms, kitchen, dining and
living areas plus bathroom, shown in Figure 17.
Figure 17 — Plan of the residential building

For each area – size of area
Use default data for rooms based on size.
58
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Details of the calculations are given in J.1.2.

11.2 Method 2
11.2.1 Example 1
Single storey product manufacturing building with facilities for administration offices,
production/assembly area and with raw material and work in progress materials in racks in the
storage area. See Figure 16 for a plan of the building.

For each area – room type and size, luminaire photometric distribution, light source type, emergency
lighting, control technique, daylight entry, occupancy periods.
Details of the calculations are given in J.2.1
11.2.2 Example 2
Residential building
living areas plus bathroom, shown in Figure 17.

For each area – room type and size.
Use default data for rooms based on size.
11.3 Method 3
11.3.1 Example 1
Existing single storey product manufacturing building with facilities for administration offices,
storage area. See Figure 16 for a plan of the building.

kWh meter readings at start of year (1st Jan) and start of next year (1st Jan) for each separately metered
area, useful area.
59
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
12 Application range
12.1 General
The methods described can be applied to all types of buildings where electric lighting is used to
provide the required illumination. The methods are not designed to estimate the energy used by
portable indoor lighting such as desk lamps. Furthermore the calculation methods are not suitable for
use where the power for the lighting control systems are not provided by the luminaire. Luminaires
powered by auxiliary power supply are not covered by this standard. Also the charging energy for
central battery systems for emergency lighting in a building are not taken into account in the standby
energy calculations.
The methods do not provide any procedure for the simulation of lighting scene settings.
In using Method 1 it is essential to carry out a comprehensive lighting scheme design for new or
refurbished buildings or to make accurate audit of the lighting installation in existing buildings.
The lighting scheme design and installation audit should be made by person(s) competent in lighting
technology and products.
12.2 Energy performance
The energy performance of lighting installations can be indicated by sub-LENI for areas and zones and
by LENI for the building. Each method provides a procedure for calculating sub-LENI and LENI.
12.3 Energy certificate
The methods described in the standard do not yield energy certification. The methods provide input to
other standards for the estimation of the total energy requirements of a building.
12.4 Inspection
12.4.1 General
Inspections of the input data and calculation method used should be made at the time the outputs are
published or handed over to other users. The process should be carried out by competent person in
energy assessments.
12.4.2 Method 1
The lighting scheme should be inspected during the commissioning of the lighting installation. The
main purpose is to check and ensure that the correct products have been installed and correctly wired,
and the interconnections with the control system operate and communicate according to design.
The correct commissioning and regular inspections in both new and existing buildings will have a
major impact upon the efficiency and future energy usage of the installation. Inspections at intervals
should be scheduled and structured to ensure the lighting system operates efficiently throughout its
working life.
12.4.3 Method 2
This method provides a preliminary energy values only and the calculation accuracy can be inspected
by use of the spreadsheet. This budget estimation should be followed up, during detailed design of the
building, by making the comprehensive lighting scheme design and by the calculation of energy
requirements as described for method 1.
12.4.4 Method 3
This method can be used to verify the energy used for electric lighting in the building and for
comparison of the calculated values during the design process.
60
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
13 Regulation use
The methods can make use of default national data as input and permit the setting of national limits of
the energy available for fixed lighting installation in a building.
14 Information on the accompanying spreadsheet

Annex L provides the considerations and operation of the spreadsheet.
15 Results of the validation tests

Annex J gives results of worked examples using each calculation method.
Annex M provides examples of results produced by the spreadsheet method of estimation.
61
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annex A
(informative)
Input and method selection data sheet – Template
A.1 General
This is a common sub-clause for all EPB standards.
More information and explanation on the concept of Annex A and Annex B for all EPB standards is
given in CEN ISO/TR 52000-2.
A.2 System design data

62
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annex B
(informative)
Input and selection data sheet - Default choices
B.1 General
This is a common sub-clause for all EPB standards.
More information and explanation on the concept of Annex A and Annex B for all EPB standards is
given in CEN ISO/TR 52000-2.
B.2 Method 1
B.3 Method 2
B.4 Method 3
63
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annex C
(informative)
Simplified Method for Installed Power Estimation
C.1 Installed power assessment for tertiary buildings

C.1.1 General
Annex C of the standard gives a procedure for the estimation of the amount of installed power
required to provide lighting to a given space. The method only gives the approximate installed power
as it makes a number of assumptions and there are a number of situations where significant errors
may occur. Thus the method is only suitable for early stage designs and should always be followed up
with an assessment of the installed power once the lighting equipment for the building has been
specified. Also the method described in C.1 is not suitable for use for areas that contain specialized
application spaces such as operating theatre or special sports playing areas such as badminton and
squash courts.
C.1.2 Estimation of the installed power for illumination
The power is estimated with Formula C.1 from EN 15193-1:2017.

P=
n Pj × A (C.1)
where
Pn is the total lighting power in the area [W]
Pj is the lighting power density in the area [W m-2]
A is the area [m2]

In turn the power density is dependent on power density per lux and the required illuminance.
Formula C.2 of the standard relates the power density to the power density per lux and the required
illuminance. There are also correction factors to allow for variation in the maintenance factor, the
efficiency of the lighting system and if some areas in the room are being lit to a lower light level.
Pj = Pj .lx × Etask × FMF × FCA × FL (C.2)
where
Pj.lx is the power density per lux of the area [w lm-1]
Etask is the maintained illuminance that the lighting system will be designed to provide [lx]
FMF is the correction factor to account for the maintenance factor that will be used in the lighting
system design
FCA is the factor to account for the reduced power required if parts of the area are lit to a lower
level
FL is the correction factor to account the efficiency of the lighting equipment that will be used in
the lighting system
Note that Formula C.2 has been set up in such a way that if FMF, FCA and FL are ignored (i.e. taken to be
1) then the formula can be simplified to Pj = Pj.lx × Etask. The result will give a slightly less accurate
estimate of the lighting power density.
64
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
C.1.3 Evaluation of Pj.lx
The value of Pj.lx is dependent on the photometric distribution of the luminaires used and the shape of
the room that they are illuminating. The shape of the room is classified according to its room index (k)
which may be evaluated using Formula C.3 from EN 15193-1:2017:
LR × WR
k= (C.3)
hm ( LR + WR )
where
LR is the length of the room [m]
WR is the width of the room [m]
hm is the height of the luminaires above the working plane in the room [m]
If the calculation room index results in a value below 0,6 then the tabular method of estimating
installed power should not be used. This is because the room has very unusual proportions and is
likely to require a non-standard approach to lighting design. If the room index is found to be greater
than 5 then value of 5 should be using in looking up the value of power density per lux in Table C.1.
This is possible that in rooms with a room index of 5 there is very little light that interacts with the
walls and the changes in going to a space where the walls make up an even smaller fraction of the
room surfaces makes very little difference.
Table C.1 — Values of power density per lux for various photometric distributions and room
indexes
Upward Flux Fraction
(description of flux emission)
k 10 % 30 % 70 % 90 %
0,60 0,037 0,043 0,064 0,087
0,80 0,032 0,038 0,053 0,070
1,00 0,030 0,035 0,046 0,060
1,25 0,027 0,033 0,041 0,051
1,50 0,026 0,031 0,037 0,046
2,00 0,024 0,029 0,033 0,039
2,50 0,023 0,028 0,030 0,035
3,00 0,022 0,027 0,029 0,032
4,00 0,021 0,026 0,026 0,029
5,00 0,021 0,025 0,025 0,027
The values in Table C.1 were derived from reviewing a large sample (over 23 000 luminaires from 5
major manufacturers) of luminaires and selecting those that had an upward flux fraction (the upward
light output ratio divided by the light output ratio) close to (within ± 0,5 % for 10 % and 30 % UFF and
within ± 2,0 % for 70 % and 90 % UFF). Then the Utilization factors for the selected luminaires were
calculated according to the method given in EN 13032-2 and hence the energy required to deliver one
maintained lumen to the working plane was calculated based on a nominal 60 luminaire lumens per
circuit watt (LL/W) and a maintenance factor of 0,8.
NOTE If it is known that the assumptions of luminaire efficiency (LL/W) and maintenance factor are not
appropriate for a given situation then they can be allowed for by selection of appropriate values of FMF and FL.
65
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
C.1.4 Evaluation of FMF
C.1.4.1 General
The lighting scheme is designed with an overall maintenance factor (MF) calculated for the selected
lighting equipment, environment and specified maintenance schedule. More information on the
derivation of maintenance factors is given in CIE 97. Once the overall maintenance factor (MF) for the
installation is determined then Formula C.4 may be used to calculate correction factor to account for
the maintenance factor (FMF).
0,8
FMF = (C.4)
MF
where
MF is the selected maintenance factor
The maintenance factor (MF) for an indoor lighting installation is a multiple of 4 factors:
MF= LLMF × LSF × LMF × RSMF
Where LLMF is the lamp lumen maintenance factor; LSF is the lamp survival factor (used only if spot-
replacement of lamps is not carried out); LMF is the luminaire maintenance factor; RSMF is the room
surface maintenance factor.
C.1.4.2 Lamp Lumen (Luminous Flux) Maintenance Factor (LLMF)
The lumen output from all lamp types reduces with time of operation. The rate of fall-off varies for
different lamp types and it is essential to consult manufacturers' data. From such data it is possible to
obtain the lamp lumen maintenance factor for a specific number of hours of operation. The lamp
lumen maintenance factor is therefore the proportion of the initial light output that is produced after a
specified time and, where the rate of fall-off is regular, may be quoted as a percentage reduction per
thousand hours of operation. Manufacturers' data will normally be based on Standard test procedures
which specify the ambient temperature in which the lamp will be tested, with a regulated voltage
applied to the lamp and, if appropriate, a reference set of control gear. If any of the aspects of the
proposed design are unusual, e.g. high ambient temperature, vibration, switching cycle, operating
attitude etc., the manufacturer should be made aware of the conditions and will advise if they affect
the life and/or light output of the lamp.
C.1.4.3 Lamp Survival Factor (LSF)
As with lamp lumen maintenance factor it is essential to consult manufacturers' data. These will give
the percentage of lamp failures for a specific number of hours operation and is only applicable where
group lamp replacement, without spot replacement, is to be carried out. These data will also be based
on assumptions such as switching cycle, supply voltage and control gear. Manufacturers should be
made aware of these aspects and should advise if these will affect the lamp life or lamp survival.
If manufacturers' data is not available then the values in Table C.2 may be used as a guide.
66
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table C.2 — Values of LLMF and LSF
Burning hours in thousand hours
Lamp typesc Differencesa 0,1 0,5 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 15 20 30
Incandescent LLMF moderate 1,00 0,97 0,93 - - - - - - - - -

LSF big 1,00 0,98 0,50 - - - - - - - - -
Halogen LLMF big 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,95 - - - - - - - -
LSF big 1,00 1,00 0,78 0,50 - - - - - - - -
Fluorescent LLMF moderate 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,97 0,93 0,92 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 -
Tri-phosphor
LSF moderate 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,98 0,97 0,94 0,50 -
(HF gear)
Fluorescent LSFL moderate 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,97 0,93 0,92 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 - -
Tri-phosphor
LSF moderate 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,98 0,92 0,50 - -
Fluorescent LLMF moderate 1,00 0,98 0,96 0,95 0,87 0,84 0,81 0,79 0,77 0,75 - -
halophosphate
LSF moderate 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,98 0,92 0,50 - -
Compact LLMF big 1,00 0,98 0,97 0,94 0,91 0,89 0,87 0,85 - - - -
fluorescent
LSF big 1,00 0,99 0,99 0,98 0,97 0,94 0,86 0,50 - - - -
Mercury LLMF moderate 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,85 0,82 0,80 0,79 0,78 0,77 0,76 -
LSF moderate 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,97 0,94 0,90 0,86 0,79 0,69 0,50 -
Metal halide LLMF big 1,00 0,98 0,95 0,90 0,87 0,83 0,79 0,65 0,63 0,58 0,50 -
(250/400 W)b
LSF big 1,00 0,99 0,99 0,98 0,97 0,92 0,86 0,80 0,73 0,66 0,50 -
Ceramic metal LLMF big 1,00 0,95 0,87 0,75 0,72 0,68 0,64 0,60 0,56 - - -
halide (50/150
W) LSF big 1,00 0,99 0,99 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,95 0,80 0,50 - - -
High pressure LLMF moderate 1,00 1,00 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,96 0,94 0,90
sodium
LSF moderate 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,99 0,99 0,99 0,97 0,95 0,92 0,50
(250/400 W)
a Indicates differences in LLMF and LSF among lamps, which belong to the same lamp type category
b Differences in group of metal halides are extremely remarkable. Very high and very low wattage lamps live
significantly shorter than values given here.
c Data for LED’s is changing rapidly guidance on values are given below.
C.1.4.3.1 LED Maintenance Factor
For LED luminaires we need to use different parameters to establish a meaningful Maintenance Factor
for lighting designs. With LEDs the LLMF and LSF can be based on the factors (Lx, By), (Lx, Cy) and (Lx,
Fy) as defined in EN 62722-2-1 where:
"Lx" is the lumen depreciation criteria for the different lifetime parameters By, Cy and Fy where x
indicates the percentage of the initial luminous flux of a luminaire.
"Lx, By" is the age at which a given percentile (y) of LED luminaires that no longer meet the lumen
depreciation criteria (x). LED luminaires that give a light output lower than the limit set by Lx are
considered as a parametric failure. This means that even though the luminaire is still operational (and
in most cases still provides substantial amount of light) the luminous flux is lower than the limit set by
67
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
x. For example the “L80 B10” life is the age at which 10 % of products produce less than 80 % of their
initial luminous flux. The age at which 50 % of the items parametrically fail, the “B50 life”, is called
Median Useful Life.
A common misperception is that the "parametrically failed" luminaires produce light far below this
threshold. However, in practice a parametrically failed luminaire will provide light "just below" the
indicated threshold, where other luminaires in the group will still produce slightly above this
threshold.
"Lx, Cy" lifetime linked to the critical or abrupt failure of a LED luminaire. Cy (equivalent to a lamp
failure) is when a failure of the LED module, driver or other component means that a luminaire no
longer provides light. It is not usual to include this element of light loss in the maintenance factor as it
is assumed that any such failure is replaced, although group replacement is still a valid practice and it
could be relevant value for maintenance planning.
"Fy" is the Failure Fraction - The failure rate over the rated life is defined as the failure fraction (Fy)
where y is the percentage of LEDs that will have failed at the end of rated life and is a combination of
gradual failure (By) and critical failure(Cy).
To allow comparison between manufacturers both the useful life and the criteria used (for example ;
L80B50) should be provided for each luminaire.
A manufacturer will declare values for Useful Life at a specified ambient temperature. For example,
L80B50 (50 000 h at 25 °C indicates that after an operating time of 50 000 h, 80 % of the initial luminous
flux will be emitted for a luminaire operating in an ambient temperature of 25 °C and by this time 50
% of the LED luminaires may dropped below this threshold. Using this example, the LED lumen
maintenance factor (which is a part of the maintenance factor determination method) is 0,8 at 50 000
h. The gradual loss of light is a specific characteristic of a luminaire and cannot be assumed from
knowledge of the performance of a single individual component (such as the performance of the
individual LEDs).
C.1.4.4 Luminaire Maintenance Factor (LMF)
Dirt deposited on or in the luminaire optical surface will cause a reduction in light output from the
luminaire. The rate at which dirt is deposited depends on the construction of the luminaire and on the
extent to which dirt is present in the atmosphere, which in turn is related to the nature of the dirt
generated in the specific environment. Table C.3 gives a list of the luminaire classes and Table C.4 gives
a list of and a list of typical locations where the various environmental conditions may be found.
Table C.3 — Luminaire classes
Class Description
A Bare lamp batten
B Open top reflector (ventilated self-cleaning)
C Closed top housing (unventilated)
D Enclosed (IP2X)
E Dustproof (IP5X)
F Indirect uplighter
G Air handling and forced ventilated
68
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table C.4 — Locations of environmental conditions

Environment Typical Locations
Very Clean (VC) Clean rooms, semiconductor plants, hospital clinical areas, computer centres
Clean (C) Offices, schools, hospital wards
Normal (N) Shops, laboratories, restaurants, warehouses, assembly areas, workshops
Dirty (D) Steelworks, chemical works, foundries, welding, polishing, woodwork
Table C.5 shows typical changes in light output from a luminaire caused by dirt deposition, for the
various types of luminaire and environment classes at different cleaning intervals.
C.1.4.5 Room Surface Maintenance Factor (RSMF)
Changes in room surface reflectance caused by dirt deposition will cause changes in the illuminance
produced by the lighting installation. The magnitude of these changes is governed by the extent of dirt
deposition and the importance of inter-reflection to the illuminance produced. Inter-reflection is
closely related to the distribution of light from the luminaire. For luminaires which have a strongly
downward distribution, i.e. direct luminaires, inter-reflection has little effect on the illuminance
produced on the horizontal working plane. Conversely, indirect lighting is completely dependent on
inter-reflections. Most luminaires lie somewhere between these extremes so most lighting
installations are dependent to some extent on inter-reflection.
Tables C.6 to C.8 show the typical changes in the illuminance from an installation that occur with time
due to dirt deposition on the room surfaces the environmental conditions given in Table C.3. From the
tables it is possible to select a room surface maintenance factor appropriate to the circumstances.
69
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table C.5 — LMF values for indoor use
Elapsed time 0,5 1,0 1,5 2,0 2,5 3,0

between
cleanings in
years
Luminaire type Environment
VC C N D VC C N D VC C N D VC C N D VC C N D VC C N D
A 0,98 0,95 0,92 0,88 0,96 0,93 0,89 0,83 0,95 0,91 0,87 0,80 0,94 0,89 0,84 0,78 0,93 0,87 0,82 0,75 0,92 0,85 0,79 0,73
B 0,96 0,95 0,91 0,88 0,95 0,90 0,86 0,83 0,94 0,87 0,83 0,79 0,92 0,84 0,80 0,75 0,91 0,82 0,76 0,71 0,89 0,79 0,74 0,68
C 0,95 0,93 0,89 0,85 0,94 0,89 0,81 0,75 0,93 0,84 0,74 0,66 0,91 0,80 0,69 0,59 0,89 0,77 0,64 0,54 0,87 0,74 0,61 0,52
D 0,94 0,92 0,87 0,83 0,94 0,88 0,82 0,77 0,93 0,85 0,79 0,73 0,91 0,83 0,77 0,71 0,90 0,81 0,75 0,68 0,89 0,79 0,73 0,65
E 0,94 0,96 0,93 0,91 0,96 0,94 0,90 0,86 0,92 0,92 0,88 0,83 0,93 0,91 0,86 0,81 0,92 0,90 0,85 0,80 0,92 0,90 0,84 0,79
F 0,94 0,92 0,89 0,85 0,93 0,86 0,81 0,74 0,91 0,81 0,73 0,65 0,88 0,77 0,66 0,57 0,86 0,73 0,60 0,51 0,85 0,70 0,55 0,45
G 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,98 1,00 0,99 0,96 0,93 0,99 0,97 0,94 0,89 0,99 0,96 0,92 0,87 0,98 0,95 0,91 0,86 0,98 0,95 0,90 0,85
70
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table C.6 — Room Surface Maintenance Factor (RSMF) for direct flux distribution - 0 ≤ UFF < 0,25
Reflectances Time [years] 0,5 1,0 1,5 2,0 2,5 3,0 3,5 4,0 4,5 5,0 5,5 6,0
ceiling/walls/floor
environment room surface maintenance factors
0,80/0,70/0,20 very clean 0,97 0,96 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95
clean 0,93 0,92 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91
normal 0,88 0,86 0,86 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85
dirty 0,81 0,80 0,80 0,80 0,80 0,80 0,80 0,80 0,80 0,80 0,80 0,80
0,80/0,50/0,20 very clean 0,98 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97
clean 0,95 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94
normal 0,91 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90
dirty 0,86 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85
0,80/0,30/0,20 very clean 0,99 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98
clean 0,97 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96
normal 0,94 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93
dirty 0,91 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90
0,70/0,70/0,20 very clean 0,97 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96
clean 0,94 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92
normal 0,89 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87
dirty 0,83 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81
0,70/0,50/0,20 very clean 0,98 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97
clean 0,96 0,95 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94
normal 0,92 0,91 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90
dirty 0,87 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86
71
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
ceiling/walls/floor
environment room surface maintenance factors
0,70/0,30/0,20 very clean 0,99 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98
clean 0,97 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96
normal 0,95 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93
dirty 0,92 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91
0,50/0,70/0,20 very clean 0,98 0,97 0,97 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96
clean 0,95 0,94 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93
normal 0,91 0,89 0,89 0,89 0,89 0,89 0,89 0,89 0,89 0,89 0,89 0,89
dirty 0,85 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84
0,50/0,50/0,20 very clean 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97
clean 0,97 0,96 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95
normal 0,94 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92
dirty 0,89 0,89 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88
0,50/0,30/0,20 very clean 0,99 0,99 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98 0,98
clean 0,98 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97
normal 0,96 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95
dirty 0,93 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92
72
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table C.7 — Room Surface Maintenance Factor (RSMF) for direct/indirect flux distribution- 0,25 ≤ UFF < 0,75
ceiling/walls/floor environment room surface maintenance factors
0,80/0,70/0,20 very clean 0,95 0,94 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93
clean 0,90 0,88 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87
normal 0,81 0,78 0,77 0,77 0,77 0,77 0,77 0,77 0,77 0,77 0,77 0,77
dirty 0,70 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,67
0,80/0,50/0,20 very clean 0,96 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95
clean 0,93 0,91 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90
normal 0,85 0,83 0,82 0,82 0,82 0,82 0,82 0,82 0,82 0,82 0,82 0,82
dirty 0,76 0,73 0,73 0,73 0,73 0,73 0,73 0,73 0,73 0,73 0,73 0,73
0,80/0,30/0,20 very clean 0,97 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96
clean 0,94 0,93 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92
normal 0,89 0,87 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86
dirty 0,81 0,79 0,78 0,78 0,78 0,78 0,78 0,78 0,78 0,78 0,78 0,78
0,70/0,70/0,20 very clean 0,96 0,94 0,94 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93
clean 0,91 0,89 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88
normal 0,83 0,80 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79
dirty 0,72 0,69 0,69 0,69 0,69 0,69 0,69 0,69 0,69 0,69 0,69 0,69
0,70/0,50/0,20 very clean 0,97 0,96 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95
clean 0,93 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91
normal 0,87 0,84 0,84 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83
dirty 0,77 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75
73
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
0,70/0,30/0,20 very clean 0,98 0,97 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96
clean 0,95 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93
normal 0,90 0,88 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87
dirty 0,82 0,80 0,80 0,80 0,80 0,80 0,80 0,80 0,80 0,80 0,80 0,80
0,50/0,70/0,20 very clean 0,97 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95 0,95
clean 0,93 0,91 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90
normal 0,86 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83
dirty 0,76 0,74 0,74 0,74 0,74 0,74 0,74 0,74 0,74 0,74 0,74 0,74
0,50/0,50/0,20 very clean 0,97 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,96
clean 0,94 0,93 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92
normal 0,89 0,87 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,86
dirty 0,81 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79
0,50/0,30/0,20 very clean 0,98 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97
clean 0,96 0,95 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94
normal 0,92 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90
dirty 0,85 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84
74
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table C.8 — Room Surface Maintenance Factor (RSMF) for indirect flux distribution - 0,75 ≤ UFF ≤ 1,00
0,80/0,70/0,20 very clean 0,93 0,91 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,89 0,89 0,89 0,89 0,89 0,89
clean 0,86 0,82 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81
normal 0,72 0,67 0,66 0,66 0,66 0,66 0,66 0,66 0,66 0,66 0,66 0,66
dirty 0,54 0,50 0,49 0,49 0,49 0,49 0,49 0,49 0,49 0,49 0,49 0,49
0,80/0,50/0,20 very clean 0,94 0,93 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91
clean 0,88 0,85 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84
normal 0,76 0,72 0,71 0,71 0,71 0,71 0,71 0,71 0,71 0,71 0,71 0,71
dirty 0,59 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,55
0,80/0,30/0,20 very clean 0,96 0,94 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93
clean 0,90 0,88 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87
normal 0,80 0,76 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75
dirty 0,64 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,60
0,70/0,70/0,20 very clean 0,93 0,91 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90 0,90
clean 0,86 0,83 0,82 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81 0,81
normal 0,73 0,68 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,67
dirty 0,55 0,51 0,50 0,50 0,50 0,50 0,50 0,50 0,50 0,50 0,50 0,50
0,70/0,50/0,20 very clean 0,95 0,93 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92
clean 0,89 0,86 0,85 0,85 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84 0,84
normal 0,77 0,73 0,72 0,72 0,72 0,72 0,72 0,72 0,72 0,72 0,72 0,72
dirty 0,60 0,56 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,55 0,55
75
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
0,70/0,30/0,20 very clean 0,96 0,94 0,94 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,93
clean 0,91 0,88 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87 0,87
normal 0,80 0,77 0,76 0,76 0,76 0,76 0,76 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75
dirty 0,65 0,61 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,60
0,50/0,70/0,20 very clean 0,94 0,92 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91 0,91
clean 0,87 0,84 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83 0,83
normal 0,75 0,70 0,69 0,69 0,69 0,69 0,69 0,69 0,69 0,69 0,69 0,69
dirty 0,57 0,52 0,52 0,52 0,52 0,52 0,52 0,52 0,52 0,52 0,52 0,52
0,50/0,50/0,20 very clean 0,95 0,93 0,93 0,93 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92 0,92
clean 0,90 0,87 0,86 0,86 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85 0,85
normal 0,78 0,74 0,73 0,73 0,73 0,73 0,73 0,73 0,73 0,73 0,73 0,73
dirty 0,61 0,57 0,57 0,57 0,57 0,57 0,57 0,57 0,57 0,57 0,57 0,57
0,50/0,30/0,20 very clean 0,96 0,95 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94
clean 0,91 0,89 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88 0,88
normal 0,81 0,78 0,77 0,77 0,77 0,77 0,77 0,77 0,77 0,77 0,77 0,77
dirty 0,66 0,62 0,61 0,61 0,61 0,61 0,61 0,61 0,61 0,61 0,61 0,61
76
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
C.1.5 Evaluation of FCA
If the whole of a room is not going to be lit to a single high illuminance value then it is possible to
reduce the installed power is a lower level. In EN 12464-1 there is a requirement for every task area to
be immediately surrounded by an area (minimum 0,5m band) that has an illuminance just one step
below the task area value. The list of these values is given in EN 15193-1:2017, Table C.2 and in this
Technical Report it is given in Table C.9. Whilst EN 12464-1 does not require a whole room to be lit to
the value of the surround area it is impractical to estimate exactly how much light will be needed over
what area until the final layout of the space is available so for this assessment of power at the early
stage of design it is necessary to work on the assumption that the area outside the task areas will be lit
to the level for the immediate surrounding area.
Table C.9 — Relationship of illuminances on immediate surrounding to the illuminated task
area
Illuminances on the task areas Illuminances on the immediate

surrounding areas
Etask
E sur
lx
lx
≥ 750 500
500 300
300 200
200 150
150 E task
100 E task
< 50 E task
NOTE This table is taken from Table 1 of EN 12464-1:2011.
Knowing the area of the room (A), the area not being lit to the task illuminance (AS) the task
illuminance ( Etask ) and the surround illuminance ( Esur ) it is possible to calculate FCA using Formula
C.5 from EN 15193-1:2017.
As × Etask + ( A − As ) × Esur
FCA = (C.5)
Etask × A
C.1.6 Evaluation of FL
In the calculation of Pj.lx the values given in Table C.1 are based on a nominal luminaire efficiency of 60
luminaire lumens per circuit watt. The values given in EN 15193-1:2017, Table C.3 (given in Table C.10
in this document) give the median value of FL for luminaires with various lamp types that were found
in a survey of over 23 000 luminaires. However, there is significant variability between different
lighting products and to illustrate this, the range given in Table C.10 gives the upper and lower FL
values of the mid 50 % of the sample.
77
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table C.10 — Values for FL
Lamp Type Median Range

Metal Halide 0,99 0,93 – 1,10
CFL Compact Fluorescent Lamp 1,56 1,32 – 1,93
LED Light Emitting Diode 0,86 0,69 – 0,97
T16 linear fluorescent 0,90 0,79 – 1,04
T26 linear fluorescent 0,95 0,84 – 1,11
TH Tungsten Halogen 4,49 3,27 – 5,39
High Pressure Sodium 1,01 0,94 – 1,06
Tungsten 6,38 6,13 – 6,65
Thus it may not be sensible to select any value of FL given in the range of Table C.10 if more
information about the selection of actual lighting products is known.
C.2 Installed power assessment for domestic buildings

C.2.1 General
Annex C of EN 15193-1:2017 gives a procedure for the estimation of the amount of installed power
required to provide lighting to a given space. The method only gives the approximate installed power
as it makes a number of assumptions and there are a number of situations where significant errors
may occur. Thus the method is only suitable for early stage designs and should always be followed up
with an assessment of the installed power once the lighting equipment for the building has been
specified.
The assessment of Installed power for domestic buildings is based on the installed luminaires.
Information on how to design lighting for domestic buildings can be found in Annex L Domestic
lighting guide.
The collection of information on illuminance values reached is difficult. There are few photometric
information available information on residential luminaires.
Default values of the installed power can be found in EN 15193-1:2017, B.2.3.5.
Default values of useful areas can be found in EN 15193-1:2017, B.2.3.6.
C.2.2 Estimation of the installed power for illumination
The power is estimated with Formula D.1 from EN 15193-1:2017.

i =n
[ ]
Pn = ∑Pi W (standard Formula D.1)
i =1
where
Pn is the total lighting power in the area [W]
Pi is the luminaire power of luminaire i [W]
Note that Formula D.1 of the standard gives similar results to the one obtained by the combination of
Formula C.1 and C.2 where FMF, FCA and FL are ignored (i.e. taken to be 1).
The result of Formula D.1 divided by the area A [m2] gives an estimation of the lighting power density.
78
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annex D
(informative)
Assessment of the installed power for lighting systems in existing buildings
In existing buildings to establish the installed luminaire power (Pi) for lighting it is necessary to carry
out a survey of the lighting system and assess the power rating and number of luminaires in the
scheme. The total luminaire power can be calculated by the summation of the rated power of each
installed luminaire as shown in Formula D.1.
i =n
[ ]
Pn = ∑Pi W (D.1)
i =1
Where n is the number of same luminaires in the area of the lighting system. If there are several (m)
types in the area than the calculation by Formula D.1 should be repeated for each type and the total Pn
is calculated by the summation ∑ (Pn1 + Pn2 +…+Pnm).
The survey should include the identification of the luminaire types in use, counting the number of each
type and recording the data information on the product label. Ideally the luminaire label should
contain the makers name, luminaire code and the technical information (lamp type, number of lamps
and lamp rating). If the luminaire power (Pi) not shown on the label this can be obtained from the
manufacturers data sheet for the luminaire. If the label is not readable than the characteristics has to
established by noting and recording the number, rating and type lamp(s) used in the luminaire from
which the luminaire power (Pi) can be established.
If the luminaire uses lamps operating directly on mains supply voltage such as mains voltage
incandescent lamps or self-ballasted fluorescent lamps than luminaire power Pi can be estimated by
Pi = (the lamp rated power) × (number of lamps in the luminaire) (D.2)
If the luminaire uses lamps connected to the mains supply via a ballast (such as linear fluorescent or
metal halide discharge lamps) or a transformer (such as low voltage tungsten halogen lamps) in the
luminaire than the luminaire power (Pi) can be estimated by
Pi = 1,2 × (the rated lamp power) × (number of lamps in the luminaire) (D.3)
The factor 1,2 is to take account of the power in the ballast or transformer.
If the luminaires in the lighting system also used for emergency lighting and/or having lighting
controls the standby powers can similarly be obtained from the manufacturers data sheets. If such
data is not available than the default energy values indicated in Table B.1 of the standard may be used.
79
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annex E
(informative)
Occupancy estimation
The occupancy dependency factor - FO - is function of the control system and the absence.
The control system dependency is taken into account through the controls function factor FOC.
The absence dependency is taken into account through the absence factor FA. The values of FA
provided in Table E.2 are defined for the different rooms/functions of each building type. If no
information of the room type is available, the absence factor FA can be determined on building level.
The building based way of determining the FA value is not so precise compared to those based on the
room type. The values in Table E.2 have been obtained from results of field studies on occupancy made
in several countries. The formulae for the determination of FA and FO values are based on values and
recommendations obtained from several European studies carried out in the EU SAVE ENPER Project.
Reference to these publications is provided in the bibliography.
The use of an occupancy factor related to the control system in the room allows ranking of the
effectiveness of the controls according to the systems in use. It also allows use to derive the data for
detailed calculation of energy use for lighting.
The relationship between the occupancy dependency factor FO (Y) and absence factor FA (X) for
various control system regimes is shown in Figure E.1.
Key
X FA
Y FO
Figure E.1 — FO as a function of FA for the different control systems
The Figure E.1 shows that there are no differences between systems for Fo values at the limits.
80
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
— For all systems, FO is equal to 1 for FA values of 0.
— For all systems, FO is equal to 0 for FA values of 1.
Between those values the hierarchy of the systems is:
1 Manual On/Off switch

2 Manual On/Off Switch + additional automatic sweeping extinction
signal
2 Automatic On/Dimmable control
3 Manual On/Dimmable control
3 Automatic On/Automatic Off
4 Manual On/Automatic Off
Where 4 is the most efficient control system and 1 is the least efficient control system.
81
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annex F
(informative)
Daylight availability
F.1General
Annex F describes a simplified approach to consider the influence of daylight on the energy need for
lighting. For this purpose, at first those evaluation areas need to be defined that are sufficiently
benefiting from daylight. Subsequently, the amount of daylight available in these areas has to be
quantified. In a first step, the quantification is based on assessing the daylighting conditions on the
basis of the daylight factor (introduced in practical planning).With consideration of the photometric
facade characteristics, the daylight factor is then correlated with an index to describe the potential of
annual energy saving due to daylight: the relative, annual luminous exposure. When necessary, the
annual values can then be converted to monthly values by use of distribution key factors. The models
are represented correspondingly for vertical facades and for rooflights. In addition, the handling of
different types of daylight-responsive lighting control systems will be addressed.
The simplified stepwise approach presented in Annex F involves the following stages to obtain the
daylight dependent quantities: daylight supply factor FD,n,j, daylight time tDay,n,j and as a function
thereof the daylight effective time teff,Day,n,j.
— F.2 contains a scheme of how to subdivide the zone to be evaluated into area sections which
receive daylight and those which do not;
— F.3 specifies a procedure how to determine the daylight supply factor FD,S,n,j for spaces lit by
vertical facades;
— F.4 specifies a procedure how to determine the daylight supply factor FD,S,n,j for spaces lit by
rooflights;
— F.5 specifies a procedure how to rate daylight responsive control systems described by the
parameter FD,C,n,j;
— F.6 describes how to convert annual values into monthly values of FD,n,j;
— F.7 provides a procedure to determine day- and night time hours;
— F.8 describes requirements for the comprehensive calculation of daylight supply.
F.2Building segmentation: Spaces benefiting from daylight

The daylit parts of an evaluation area are determined as a function of the relevant room and facade
parameters, for both vertical facades and for rooflights. In this process, area boundaries need to be
defined, in the sense of sufficient supply of daylight to fulfil the visual requirements. Generally, it is
assumed that daylight areas are assigned to individual facade apertures, e.g. a window or a rooflight
(system). Possible intersections of the daylit areas with room enclosing surfaces and with other daylit
areas are to be considered. For this purpose, application of two different procedures is possible. Either
by superimposition or by selecting the dominant influence, as described below.
82
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Vertical facades
Based on existing methods [F1] as well as on empirical and calculated values [F2], the area receiving
daylight through vertical facades is defined via the difference between lintel height hLi and the height
of the task area hTa. The depth of the daylight area derives therefrom equal to
aD,max = 2,5 (hLi-hTa). (standard Formula F.1)
For a common-type facade design featuring a height of the window lintel above the floor of 2,8 m and a
height of the task area of 0,8 m, the factor 2,5 defines the depth of the daylit area to be equal to 5 m.
Furthermore, the width of the daylight area needs to be defined as well. Since (as depicted in
Figure F.1 in lateral areas beside windows - at least in a certain range - daylighting conditions are
generally found to be quite sufficient, the width of the daylit area should exceed the width of the
window. For simplified modelling, a marginal strip equal to a quarter of the depth of the daylight area,
is added at each side of the window. If facade apertures extend across the entire width of the facade,
this can hence be assumed to be the width of the daylight area. By defining depth and width of the
daylight area in this manner, frequently designed space layouts can be regarded as being fully supplied
with daylight.
Figure F.1 — Daylight factor distributions in a model space, calculated using a tool for light
planning [F3]
The zone that is to be considered as daylit area according to the evaluation method has been
highlighted.
83
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Key
AD
AND
l room width
b room depth
hLi lintel height
hTa hight of task area
Figure F.2 — Daylight area AD of a window that covers only part of the facade (left). Daylight
area being equal to evaluation area, as windows extend over the facade (right).
To avoid disproportionally small areas without daylight supply, a inclusion rule was introduced. Area
depths, which are smaller than 0,25 times the amount of the calculated maximum depth of the daylight
area, will be added to the daylight-receiving area. This rule is illustrated in Figure F.3. For instance, if a
room that is 5 m in depth has a calculated daylight area depth of 4 m, the daylight area may be
extended up to the rear wall.
Key
AD
AND
including area to AD
l room width
b room depth
hLi lintel height
hTa hight of task area
Figure F.3 — Illustration of the inclusion rule
84
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Left: Non-daylight area AND with an additional depth of more than 0,25 times the depth of the daylight
area AD; Right: Additional depth (Including area to AD) of less than 0,25 times the calculated daylit
depth will be included in the daylight area.
Rooflights
In general, evaluation areas located below rooflights that are uniformly distributed across the rooftop
can be assumed to receive daylight. In the case of single rooflights and of borderlines to areas with
uniformly distributed rooflights, again adjacent areas need to be considered, which additionally
benefit from daylight supply. Corresponding to an angular range of 45° below the rooflights,
additionally receiving daylight (see Figure F.4), those adjacent areas are considered in approximation,
determined by:
aD, ≤ hR - hTa (standard's Formula F.3)
Figure F.4 — Illustration of daylit areas for rooflight solutions
Daylit areas: Intersection with space enclosing surfaces and mutual overlapping
In the majority of cases, spaces are lit from one side only, so that the daylit areas can be determined
right away, as described above. There are, however, cases of special space geometries and facade
layouts where, due to the geometrical allocation of the daylit areas to individual transparent facade
surfaces, overlapping with the room enclosing surfaces may occur. If there are several transparent
facade surfaces and thus several daylit areas within one evaluation area, this may result in daylit areas
overlapping each other. It is therefore necessary to intersect the areas against the room enclosing
surface and to offset them against each other to ensure that the areal balance in the evaluation area
under review is actually correct. As lighting conditions overlap in the intersecting areas and hence
improve, rules of precedence for evaluating the daylighting conditions need to be determined.
Basically, two different methods can be applied here:
1) Superimposition of the daylight factors in the overlapping daylit areas with subsequent
correlation to the relative luminous exposure.
2) Selection of the greatest relative luminous exposure of the overlapping daylit areas. In this way,
the area that is best supplied with daylight prevails.
Figure F.5 gives an example of both procedures.
85
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
a) Daylight areas of the different b) Procedure 1 – Superimposition if the c) Procedure 2 – Area with the greatest relative
transparent façade elements daylight factors [%] in the overlapping luminous exposure prevails:
area HN,rel,1 > HN,rel,6 > HN,rel,5 = HN,rel,3 > HN,rel,2 > HN,rel,4
Where
1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are vertical façade elements and 6 is rooflight
Figure F.5 — Illustration of superimposition and overlapping of daylit areas
86
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
According to procedure 1, further sub-areas with varying daylight factors may arise that need to be
evaluated, where overlapping occurs. Besides, daylight factors in areas located far away from windows
may be higher than in areas near windows. For further simplification, the standard covers super
position only in the case of equal types of facade systems (vertical or rooflights). According to
procedure 2, the number of the elemental areas with different relative luminous exposures does not
exceed the number of transparent facade surfaces. But daylight supply in the overlapping areas is
easily underestimated compared to procedure 1. As the daylight supply of vertical facades is
determined in the centre of the respective area (parallel to the facade) and overlapping tends to occur
in deep indoor areas, the approximation according to procedure 2 appears to be more appropriate.
F.3Daylight supply factor for vertical facades
F.3.1 General
To assess the impact of daylight on indoor lighting conditions and the resulting energy need for
supplementary lighting, the (relative) usable luminous exposure is used as a time-integral assessment
parameter. The relative usable luminous exposure is equivalent to the daylight supply factor. A
schematic representation of this parameter is given in Figure F.6. where also the concept of the
’system potential’ SP [F4] is introduced. The system potential presents an energy efficiency (or
utilization) factor to describe the need for complementing the available daylight by artificial lighting in
order to achieve the required maintained illuminance. In a given daylight-responsive, dimming
lighting control system, the relative usable luminous exposure specifies the share of daylight (as a
percentage of the required quantity of light) that is available at a defined area during the respective
time interval. In planning, this parameter usually refers to a monthly or annual time interval.
Key
luminous Exposure HN
excess light SP < 1, i. e. the artificial lighting system provides more light than needed
during the operation time
lack light SP > 1, i. e. the artificial lighting system provides less light than needed during
the operation time
Y illuminance (lx)
t time (h)
Figure F.6 — Schematic representation of the usable luminous exposure and the system
potential using a typical daytime illuminance profile, following [7]
87
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
a) Sun shading not activated b) Sun shading activated
Figure F.7 — Photographs of the façade operating modes considered in the status-related,
relative usable luminous exposure
Generally, the lighting properties of complex fenestration systems/ façades are modified by activating
or deactivating the solar radiation and/or glare protection systems (see Figure F.7). Consequently, an
extended façade-related definition of the relative usable luminous exposure was introduced,
depending on the operating times tSNA and tSA with deactivated and activated solar protection devices:
t =tSNA
H=
N , SNA ∫ ED ⋅ dt [ lxh ] (F.1)
t =0
and
t =tSA
H=
N , SA ∫E D ⋅ dt [ lxh ] (F.2)
t =0
Based on the usable luminous exposures HN,SNA and HN,SA, the corresponding relative usable luminous
exposures can be determined, which are equivalent to the respective daylight supply factors.
1
H N=
, SNA, rel F=
D, S , SNA H N , SNA × 100 [%] (F.3)
E m t SNA
and
1
H N=
, SA, rel F=
D, S , SA H N , SA ⋅ 100 [%] (F.4)
E m t SA
Calculating these values in proportion to the total operating time during daytime hours, they add up to
the relative usable luminous exposure or daylight supply factor, respectively, for the total operating
time, as follows:
H N ,rel = trel , D , SNA ⋅ H N , SNA,rel + trel , D , SA ⋅ H N , SA,rel = (F.5 equivalent to

standard’s Formula
= trel , D , SNA ⋅ FD , S , SNA + trel , D , SA ⋅ FD , S , SA = FD , S
F.15)
where
tSNA operating time with deactivated solar protection [h],
tSA operating time with activated solar protection [h],
relative portion of the operating time during which the solar
trel,D,SNA
protection system is not activated
88
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
relative portion of the operating time during which the solar

trel,D,SA
protection system is activated
HN,SNA usable luminous exposure at times when the solar protection is
not activated [lxh],
HN,SA usable luminous exposure at times when the solar protection is
activated [lxh],
HN,SNA,rel relative usable luminous exposure at times when the solar
protection is not activated
FD,S,SNA daylight availability factor being evaluated at times when the solar
protection is not activated,
HN,SA,rel relative usable luminous exposure at times when the solar
protection is activated
FD,S,SA daylight availability factor being evaluated at times when the solar
protection is activated,
Em maintained illuminance [lx],
ED illuminance by daylight [lx].
The extended definition of the relative usable luminous exposure or daylight supply factor
respectively allows performing a differentiated analysis of indoor space lighting as a function of the
construction and the operating mode of the complex fenestration system. It is possible to describe the
contributions the different operating states have in the total usable luminous exposure. Therefore, any
status involving solar shading and/or glare protection (or not) may be evaluated and individually
optimized, if need be.
Development of a simple model
The integrals used in Formula (F.1) and (F.2) can be analysed with relation to the object by conducting
measurements under real skies or in the design process, by doing detailed simulations for the concrete
model spaces and periods under review [F5]. In most practical cases, however, this approach is not
considered the appropriate way of proceeding, as it requires time-consuming and cost-intensive light
measurements or calculations. An alternative option is the application of a simplified method to
estimate the relative usable luminous exposures for complex fenestration systems for any site and
location. This method was derived by a parameter study in [F6], where the relative usable luminous
exposures were determined on the basis of a correlation established for relative usable luminous
exposures that were calculated for various space and façade configurations against appropriate
measures characterizing exactly these relevant space and façade parameters.
The development of this simple calculation method to determine the daylight supply of indoor spaces
lit through vertical façades at different geographic locations and climates was based on a detailed
parametric study, from which a globally applicable empirical model was derived, which represents an
extension of a methodology already used in previous versions of this standard. The model allows to
estimate the relative usable luminous exposure (by daylight) for indoor spaces equipped with complex
fenestration systems (CFS).
The quality of the results of the parametric study and the subsequent development of the simplified
model strongly relied on the appropriate identification of representative sites. Selection criteria for the
representative sites were the location (latitude) and the specific irradiance distribution, correlating
with the relative usable luminous exposure outside. For climatic data the study relied on the
Meteonorm weather data sets.
89
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
The basic structure of the simple model, the standard’s method is based on, is depicted in Table F.1.
The model requires the following input parameters:
— Site,
— Climatic data,
— Room and façade characteristics including orientation.
The model provides the following quantities:

— Day- and night time (tday, tnight) during operating hours throughout the year,
— Time with shading activated (tSA) and shading not activated (tSNA) during daytime tday for different
orientations (N,E,S,W),
— Relative usable luminous exposure for times with shading activated (HN,rel,SNA) and shading not
activated (HN,rel,SA) during daytime for different maintained illuminances [100 lx, 300 lx, 500 lx,
750 lx, 1 000 lx],
— Total relative usable luminous exposure for different maintained illuminances [100 lx, 300 lx,
500 lx, 750 lx, 1 000 lx].
90
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table F.1 — Structure of the model with input parameters and complete model (consisting of auxiliary sub-models and the regression model)
Input parameters Overall model Further processings
Auxiliary models Regression Models
Requirement Illuminance (Em) Astronomic sky tday Time periods Daylight FD,S
model tSNA = g(γ, Hdir/Hglob, β) supply
factor
tSA = tday - tSNA
Geographic Latitude (γ) Photometric sky Hdir Energy WL
location Longitude (φ) model Hglob demand
for
lighting
Climate Direct radiation (Idir) Daylight factor DRB Relative usable luminous exposures …
Global radiation (Iglob) model HN,rel,SNA = h(DRB, γ, τeff, SNA, Hdir/Hglob, β, Em)
Space Space Geometry Photometric façade τeff, SNA
HN,rel,SA = i(DRB, γ, τeff, SA, vSA, Hdir/Hglob, β, Em)
Reflectance model τeff, SA HN,rel,SA = j(DRB, γ, sunshading type, Hdir/Hglob, β, Em)a
Building carcass opening vSA
HN,rel = tSNA/tday ⋅ HSNA + tSA/tday ⋅ HSA
Obstruction situation
Façade Photometrics (τD65, q, k1, k2, k3)

Type of sunshading
Orientation (β)
a System-related approach, based on tables.
91
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
The model employed the following sub-models for pre-processing, which will be further covered in the
following chapters when relevant:
— Astronomic model: From a selection of worldwide, representative geographic locations, the
cumulated daytime hours were determined. Daytime is considered between sunup and sundown.
For the sake of simplification, a five-day working week with operating hours from 8 am through 5
pm was assumed. There from a set of daytime and night-time hours tday, tnight could be determined
for the different latitude corridors considered, as presented in Table F.2.
Table F.2 — tday and tnight as a function of latitude for standard operating hours from 8 am – 5
pm, weekends excluded
Latitude tday [h] tnight [h]

0° 2346 0
7,5° 2346 0
22,5° 2346 0
37,5° 2341 5
52,5° 2271 75
67,5° 1881 465
75,0° 1629 717
— Photometric sky model: The outside annual relative usable luminous exposures (direct and global)
were calculated from global and direct irradiation on an hourly basis as contained in
meteorological weather datasets (e. g. Meteonorm, TRY), the luminous efficacy of radiation, and
the astronomic model of the sun position. In an intermediate step, the pre-processing routines
also provide hourly average illuminances (Esky, Esun).
— Daylight factor model: From the geometry of the space, reflectance of indoor surfaces, size and
location of the carcass openings and outside obstructions the daylight factor is determined. This
calculation can generally either be performed by detailed lighting simulations, or by using
simplified methods, as introduced in F.3.1 and described in the following.
— Photometric façade model: The façade is characterized by the type and photometry of façade
components, the façade orientation and factors accounting for a reduction in light penetration
(dirt on glazing factor, framing ratio). The latter ones are included in the simplified determination
of the daylight factor as described below.
F.3.2 Daylight factor classification
Simple model for determining the daylight factor

Detailed calculation methods allow to determine the daylight factor for any given room geometry and
reflectance of the room enclosing surfaces. However, these methods also require more input
parameters and sometimes detailed knowledge of lighting technology and simulation models. This is
why a simplified model for determining the daylight factor at the described point of determination as a
function of generally available parameters was derived. The model was developed by regression of
daylight factors that were calculated by a computer programme for lighting applications and
compared to geometric measures. It is based on approximately 800 variations [F7].
The model is based on the following standard reflectances of room surfaces:
— Floor: 0,2
92
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
— Wall: 0,5
— Ceiling: 0,7
— Exterior (Ground, obstruction): 0,2
If the evaluation is to include the impact of different reflectances or the precise examination of
obstruction situations, alternative methods can be used for determining the daylight factor. To further
process these values using the simplified method, the daylight factor then also needs to be determined
for the building carcass opening at the area’s central axis.
According to the simple model, the daylight factor (based on the regression) results to
DCA = [(4,13 + 20,0) * ITr – (1,36 * IRD) * ISh] [%] (standard’s Formula F.14)
where
ITR Transparency index,
IRD Room depth index,
ISh Obstruction index.
The transparency index describes the relation between the area of the building carcass opening and
the respective daylight area. This index compensates the effect that - with certain given facade
aperture geometries - even small building carcass openings may evidently produce large daylight
areas.
The room depth index relates the depth of the area aTl to the difference between the lintel height hLi
and the work plane height hTa. Being coupled to the creation of daylight-receiving areas it cannot
exceed values of 2,5. Higher room depth indexes cause smaller daylight factors compared to low room
depth indexes, as the control axis (half the depth of the area) is shifted further away from the facade.
The obstruction index ISh takes into account the reduction of the luminous flux that enters through the
facade due to:
— linear obstructions;
— horizontal and vertical overhangs;
— inner courtyards and atria; and
— double glass facades.
The formula was developed by geometrical parameterization (see Figure F.8), which was based on
regression of numerous simulation models.
93
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
a) Linear Shading
b) Horizontal projection c) Vertical projection
d) Glazed double façade e) Courtards and atria
Figure F.8 — Geometrical parameterization of obstructions for the obstruction index
Figure F.9 presents a comparison of daylight factors determined by a lighting calculation programme
and those calculated using the regression Formula (standard’s Formula F.14). Figure F.10 describes
the regression plane parameterized by ITr and IRD of the unobstructed room. Compared to the space
depth index, the transparency index is the more significant parameter. Regarding the otherwise
unmodified parameters, the daylight factor DCA increases as the building carcass opening and the
difference hlintel – hTaskArea are increasing. On the other hand, DCA decreases with greater areas
benefiting from daylight and greater room depth. Consequently, the selected approach appears to be
generally plausible. In given combinations of great space depth indexes IRD and small transparency
indexes ITR, the daylight factor DCA may have negative values (see grey section in Figure F.10).
94
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Key
X room type
Y daylight factor for the building carcass opening [%]
1 calculated as function of ITr, IRD and ISh
2 compted by "Radiance"
Figure F.9 — Comparison of the daylight factors computed by a lighting calculation programme
and the daylight factors for the building carcass opening DCA, which were calculated as a
function of ITr and IRD, for all 30 examined cases of unobstructed space situations.
Key
X room depth index
Y transparency index
Figure F.10 — Regression plane, Calculated daylight factor plotted above the regression plane
parameterized with ITr and IRD. The pairs of indexes (ITr, IRD) for the 30 cases of unobstructed
spaces under review are indicated. Data points can cover each other.
95
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
F.3.3 Daylight supply factor
Based on the simplified model introduced previously and depicted in Figure F.9, the daylight supply
factor can be determined, based on the classification of daylight availability depending on the daylight
factor, on the luminous exposure at different sites (climates, latitudes) and on the façade system as
well as on the façade’s orientation.
The tables presented in the standard, which allow to determine the relative times for not activated
solar protection systems as a function of the façade orientation, the geographic latitude and the ratio of
luminous exposure (Table F.2) and the daylight supply factor for sun shading not activated as a
function of the daylight factor, the latitude, the maintained illuminance and the ratio of luminous
exposure for different orientations (Tables F.4 – F.6) are based on regressions performed as described
in the following.
Regression of operating times tSNA, tSA
The subdivision of daytime tday into the time intervals with sunshading activated tSA and sunshading
not activated tSNA depends on the location, i. e. latitude, and climate. It was found that a feasible
dependency of tSNA for the latitude angles and the ratio of direct usable luminous exposure to global
usable luminous exposure Hdir/Hglob could be established. A low value Hdir / Hglobal represents a rather
cloudy, a high value respectively a rather sunny climate.
Figure F.11 illustrates the dependencies for the four main orientations. Table F.3 holds the regression
coefficients of a polygonal fit of Formula F.5.
 H 
tSNA  γ , dir , orientation 
g=
 H global 
 H   H 
aor + bor cosγ + c or cos  dir  + d or cos 2γ + e or cosγ + e or cosγ cos  dir
= 
H  H 
 glob   glob  (F.5)
 H   H 
+ f or cos 2  dir  + g or cos 3γ + hor cos 2γ cos  dir 
H  H 
 glob   glob 
 H   H 
+ i or cosγ cos 2  dir  + j or cos 3  dir 
 H glob   H glob 
   
aor - jor Regression coefficients for the orientation considered.

With tSNA and tday known, tSA can be directly obtained.
96
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
a) Orientation South
b) Orientation North
c) Orientation West, appr. East
Figure F.11— Times with deactivated sunshading tSNA as function of the geographic latitude and
the ratio Hdir / Hglobal
97
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table F.3 — Regression parameters for Formula (F.6)
Orientation aor bor cor dor eor for gor hor ior jor
- - -
South
1978,69 623,74 933,58 191,99 68,46 105,56 237,66 218,40 -93,31 117,7
-
East
2445,94 511,68 524,31 361,73 151,62 -54,81 175,91 -45,47 -49,49 8,24
- - -
West
2386,46 443,73 469,12 270,78 311,13 -15,62 165,84 145,93 138,35 85,21
Mean value -
2416,20 477,71 496,72 231,37 -35,22 170,87 -95,70 -93,92 46,73
East/West 316,26
-
North
2818,42 386,97 126,66 488,91 276,16 -0,81 131,01 83,60 -37,47 -20,92
Regression of the relative usable luminous exposure / daylight supply factor

The relative usable luminous exposure was obtained from a regression against the daylight factor:
Einterior
D= [%] (F.6)
Eexterior
where
Einterior Illuminance inside [lx]
Eexterior Illuminance outside for unobstructed, overcast sky [lx]
The choice of the daylight factor as a reference parameter is recommended for several reasons:
— The daylight factor represents the ratio of the internal illuminance to the external illuminance, as
determined for the unobstructed sky. Hence, it is an evaluation parameter that does not depend
on site or climate, approximately describing the influence that structural parameters (e.g. space or
ambient parameters) and the façade geometry (layout and dimensions) have on natural space
lighting conditions.
— Having been introduced as a simple measure, it is widely used in planning practice and it is often
used to describe the daylighting conditions. There have been previous correlations of the daylight
factor with measures characterising the energy-saving potential associated with the use of
daylight. Although these methods as yet have not allowed considering advanced, complex sun
protection or glaring protection systems for any and all site and climate, they are generally known.
Figure F.12 illustrates the principle of the correlation approach. With an improved building
construction and, accordingly, an increased daylight factor, the relative luminous exposure increases
while the façade system remains unchanged. For a given building construction, i. e. a fixed daylight
factor, the relative usable luminous exposure will increase as the construction of the façade system is
improved. Once the daylight factor has reached a certain level, a kind of saturation effect can be
observed; there is only a slight increase in the relative usable luminous exposure. This is why a
significant increase in daylight will result in only a minor increase of the energy saving potential. In
addition, it has to be considered that this approach depends on the maintained illuminance. If the
maintained illuminance decreases, less sunlight is needed at the control point. With a constant supply
of daylight and a lesser maintained illuminance, the relative usable luminous exposure will increase.
As the daylight factor does not depend on orientation, the impact of orientation on the lighting
conditions is to be specified as a property of the façade.
98
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Key
X daylight factor of carcass opening [%]
Y relative luminous exposure [%]
1 maintained illuminance
2 dependent on façade system
Figure F.12 — Schematic representation of the correlation principle between daylight factor,
façade properties, and maintained illuminance with relative usable luminous exposure
99
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Key Key
X daylight factor of carcass opening DRB[%] X daylight factor D [%]
Y relative usable luminous exposure (sun shading not activated) [%] Y relative usable luminous exposure (sun shading not activated) [%]
Descrentization Interpolation Regression Descrentization Interpolation
El Caraño System 1 Standard
El Fasher System 2 Light directing
System 3 Permanent shading
a) Diagram 1 b) Diagram 2
Figure F.13— Example correlation of the daylight factor and the relative usable luminous exposure for the two different sites and climates of El
Caraño and El Fasher
100
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Figure F.13 exemplarily shows the correlation of HN,rel,SNA and HN,rel,SA for the two locations El Caraño
and El Fasher. HN,rel,SNA depends on the climate, whereas HN,rel,SA mainly alters as a function of the façade
type considered.
H N ,rel , SNA = h ( DRB ,γ , teff , SNA , H dir / H glob , β , Em ) (F.7)

and
H N ,rel , SA = j ( DRB ,γ ,sun shading type, H dir / H glob , β , Em ) (F.8)
The correlated values were derived as a function of the daylight factor DCA, latitude (geographic
corridor) γ, façade parameters, ratio Hdir/Hglobal, façade orientation β and maintained illuminance Em.
F.3.4 Example
The following example illustrates the application of the model for vertical facades. The geometry of the
space under consideration and the artificial lighting installation correspond are defined in Table F.4
and depicted in Figure F.14. Evaluation is exemplarily performed for the location of Brussels (altitude:
50,8°; longitude: 4,3°), experiencing an oceanic climate (Cfb) according to the Köppen Geiger climate
classification.
Figure F.14 — Geometry of the example daylit via vertical façade
101
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table F.4 — Boundary conditions of the example
Parameter Variation
Width 3,60 m
Depth 4,80 m
Height 3,00 m
Space geometry Reflectance ρ, ambient 0,2
Reflectance ρ, ground 0,2
Reflectance ρ, walls 0,5
Reflectance ρ, ceiling 0,7
Orientation South
Obstruction 0°
Light transmission τD65 glazing 0,74 see Table F4a
Façade Framing ratio k1 0,9
Pollution of glazing factor k2 0,9

Construction 40 % standard window/façade ratio
System Blinds, reference system
Specific installed power 12 W/m2

Maintained illuminance 500 lx
Lighting System
Control strategy Continuous dimming
Control point, position 1 control point in the centre of the room
8 am to 5 pm, Monday through Friday, no
Working hours
vacation
Table F.4a — Typical values of the transmittance τD65,SNA of transparent and translucent
building components
Type U g⊥ τe τD65,SNA
Single glazing 5,8 0,87 0,85 0,90

Double glazing 2,9 0,78 0,73 0,82
Triple glazing 2,0 0,70 0,63 0,75
low-e glazing, double glazed 1,7 0,72 0,60 0,74
low-e glazing, triple glazed 0,8 0,50 0,39 0,69
low-e glazing, triple glazed 0,6 0,50 0,39 0,69
Solar protection glazing, double 1,3 0,48 0,44 0,59
102
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Step 1: Determination of ratio Hdir/Hglob

The ratios of direct and global outside relative usable luminous exposure are calculated from the
corresponding weather data set:
Hdir = 30,45 Mlxh; Hglob = 86,00 Mlxh, henceHdir/Hglob = 0,35
Step 2: Determination of tday (astronomic model)
The time tday, which represents „sun up” and the time tnight, which represents „sun down” during
working hours, is determined from the standard’s Table F.19 by linear interpolation. The
corresponding value is:
tday = 2 278 h; tnight = 68 h
Step 3: Determination of tSNA and tSA (regression model)
trel,D,SNA is determined from Table F.3 of the standard.
trel,SA is obtained by subtracting from 1. tSNA and tSA can then be obtained by multiplication with tday.
tSNA = 1 595 h; tSA = 684 h
Step 4: Determination of daylight factors
The daylight factor is determined by means of a detailed simulation in the middle of the room (at the
control point position of the artificial lighting system for the room). A daylight factor of DCA = 6,81 %
for the building carcass opening is obtained. For the glazed façade without shading activated the
effective transmission τeff,SNA is calculated with τD65 = 74 %, k1 = 0,9; k2 = 0,9; k3 = 0,85:
τeff,SNA = k1 × k2 × k3 ×τD65 = 0,51
From this the daylight factor with the glazed façade is determined:
D = τeff,SNA × DCA = 0,51 × 6,81 % = 3,47 %
Note to obtain daylight classification for D use Table F.1 in the standard by replacing DCA,j with D. The
classification may be used to obtain FD,C,j in Table F.16 of the standard.
Step 5: Determination of Daylight supply factors FD,s,SNA,j, FD,s,SA,j
From the geographical location, Hdir/Hglob (step 2), D (step 4), and Em the quantities FD,s,SNA,j, FD,s,SA,j are
determined (using linear interpolation). In the following substeps the procedure is demonstrated for
standard venetian blinds (System solution 1 according to the standard’s Table F.7). The resulting
values for the other systems considered can be obtained in the same manner. System 2 corresponds to
a ventian blind system operated in cut-off mode. System 3 represents sun protection glazing with
internal roller blinds for glare protection.
a) FD,s,SNA, for system solution 1, using the standard’s Table F.4
FD,s,SNA, (3,47 %; 0,35) = 76,9 %;

b) FD,s,SA for system solution 1, using the standard’s Table F.7
FD,s,SA (6,81 %; 0,35) = 25,3 %

c) FD,s for system solution 1, using the standard’s Formula (F.15)
1 595 h 684 h
F D, S
= ⋅ 76, 9 % + =
⋅ 25, 3 % 61, 4 %
(1 595 h + 684 h ) (1 595 h + 684 h )
The following table additionally contains the equally derived values for the above given systems 2 and
3:
103
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table F.5 — FD,s,SNA,j, FD,s,SA,j and FD,s,j for system solutions 1, 2, 3
FD,s,SNA FD,s,SA FD,s

System Solution
[%] [%] [%]
System 1 76,9 25,3 61,4
System 2 76,9 88,1 80,3
System 3 65,7 24,9 53,5
F.4Daylight supply factor for rooflights

F.4.1 General
The evaluation of daylight supply through rooflights essentially follows the same procedure that is
applied when evaluating vertical facades. Again, the daylighting conditions prevailing in the daylit
areas are to be assessed by means of daylight factors. For this purpose, it will be referred to an existing
simple method for determining the mean daylight factors resultant on the task area. In distinction to
vertical facades, rooflight solutions allow to significantly improve uniform lighting conditions, so that
the mean daylight factor on the work plane is referred to as a criterion for evaluation. By analogy with
the treatment of vertical facades, here a split approach will be used again, distinguishing between
times of activated and de-activated movable solar shading systems.
When describing the facade characteristics, dome lights, continuous rooflights, and shed rooflights can
be distinguished. In the case of rooflights, the correlation is done for the daylight factors, which
already consider the facade system (i.e. the glazing characteristics).
The newly developed model is based on existing methods (e.g. following [F8]) and allows the
simplified calculation of the relative luminous exposure in spaces receiving light through rooflights,
which are provided with sun protection systems that can be selectively activated. The model was
developed on the basis of the following assumptions:
— The boundary conditions for the general model were assumed in accordance with [F9] (among
others, consideration of the mean daylight factors, climatic boundary conditions, obstruction
situation, types of glazing, room reflectances etc.).
— For the sake of simplicity the shading systems were assumed to have ideal, diffuse transmission
properties. This approximation was verified against detailed lighting characteristics.
— Corresponding to the evaluation of vertical facades, the control strategy for the sunshading
devices is chosen such that the shading system will be activated when the facade is exposed to
direct sunlight. If the facade is not exposed to sunlight, the solar shading system is de-activated.
F.4.2 Daylight availability factor
Unlike with vertical facades, for rooflights two different daylight factors are applied, for the situations
of activated and non-activated sunshading devices. Mostly these two factors differ from each other
only by different light transmittances τSA, and τSNA, which reflect the different photometric
characteristics of these two system conditions. It is however possible that also other (correction)
factors may vary due to activation of the shading system.
The general principle of the classification of daylight availability in the four categories “strong”,
“medium”, “low” and “none”, depending on the daylight factor, is then applied to both values.
Regarding the condition 'sunshading activated' it is assumed that, due to the considerably higher
luminous exposures of the roof facades in the respective time intervals, lower daylight factors will be
sufficient to achieve the corresponding daylight-supply classes.
104
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
F.4.3 Daylight supply factor
Like for vertical facades the daylight supply factor can be determined according to a simplified
method, based on the classification of daylight availability depending on the daylight factor, on the
location, the orientation, and surface slope as well as on the maintained illuminance.
Again, the tables presented in the standard which allow determining the relative times and the
daylight supply factor (EN 15193-1:2017, Tables F.14 F.15) result from regressions based on a
parameter study performed for different climates. The following six representative locations were
analysed:
As the standard only contains the respective tables for the central Europe example location
Frankfurt/Germany, the tables for the remaining five locations are presented in the following, starting
with Table F.6 for Athens.
105
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table F.6 — ATHENS: Daylight supply factor FD,SNA,j for rooflights when shading is not activated as a function of the classification of daylight
availability and of the maintained illuminance for different orientations and surface slopes
Classification of daylight availability
Surface
Orientation Lowa Mediuma Stronga
slope
100 lx 300 lx 500 lx 750 lx 1 000 lx 100 lx 300 lx 500 lx 750 lx 1 000 lx 100 lx 300 lx 500 lx 750 lx 1 000 lx
Horizontal 0° 1,00 0,92 0,83 0,69 0,55 1,00 0,97 0,93 0,87 0,80 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,94 0,90
30° 0,99 0,92 0,82 0,67 0,52 1,00 0,97 0,93 0,87 0,79 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,89
45° 0,99 0,91 0,79 0,62 0,48 1,00 0,97 0,92 0,85 0,76 1,00 0,99 0,96 0,92 0,88
South
60° 0,99 0,89 0,75 0,56 0,43 1,00 0,96 0,90 0,82 0,71 1,00 0,98 0,95 0,91 0,86
90° 0,97 0,83 0,62 0,42 0,32 1,00 0,93 0,85 0,71 0,57 1,00 0,97 0,93 0,86 0,78
30° 0,99 0,92 0,82 0,66 0,52 1,00 0,97 0,93 0,86 0,79 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,89
South-East/ 45° 0,99 0,89 0,77 0,60 0,47 1,00 0,96 0,91 0,83 0,74 1,00 0,99 0,95 0,91 0,86
South-West 60° 0,98 0,86 0,71 0,52 0,40 1,00 0,95 0,88 0,78 0,67 1,00 0,98 0,95 0,89 0,82
90° 0,97 0,81 0,58 0,40 0,30 1,00 0,94 0,84 0,68 0,54 1,00 0,97 0,93 0,85 0,75
30° 0,99 0,88 0,77 0,62 0,48 1,00 0,96 0,90 0,82 0,74 1,00 0,99 0,96 0,90 0,85
45° 0,99 0,86 0,71 0,54 0,41 1,00 0,96 0,88 0,77 0,67 1,00 0,99 0,95 0,89 0,82
East/ West
60° 0,99 0,84 0,66 0,47 0,36 1,00 0,95 0,87 0,73 0,62 1,00 0,98 0,95 0,88 0,79
90° 0,98 0,79 0,55 0,37 0,28 1,00 0,94 0,82 0,65 0,51 1,00 0,97 0,93 0,84 0,72
30° 0,99 0,87 0,75 0,59 0,46 1,00 0,96 0,89 0,80 0,72 1,00 0,99 0,95 0,90 0,84
North-East/ 45° 0,99 0,85 0,68 0,51 0,39 1,00 0,96 0,87 0,75 0,65 1,00 0,99 0,95 0,88 0,80
North-West 60° 0,99 0,83 0,63 0,45 0,34 1,00 0,95 0,86 0,71 0,59 1,00 0,98 0,95 0,87 0,77
90° 0,98 0,78 0,53 0,36 0,27 1,00 0,94 0,82 0,63 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,83 0,71
30° 0,99 0,86 0,73 0,57 0,45 1,00 0,95 0,87 0,78 0,70 1,00 0,98 0,95 0,88 0,82
45° 0,99 0,83 0,66 0,49 0,38 1,00 0,95 0,85 0,73 0,62 1,00 0,99 0,94 0,86 0,78
North
60° 0,99 0,81 0,61 0,43 0,33 1,00 0,95 0,83 0,69 0,57 1,00 0,98 0,94 0,84 0,75
90° 0,98 0,79 0,53 0,36 0,27 1,00 0,94 0,82 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,83 0,71
a The classification is based on the following daylight factors of the raw building carcass opening DCa,j: Low:3 %; Medium: 5,5 %; Strong: 8,5 %.
106
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table F.7 — ATHENS: Daylight supply factor FD,SA,j for rooflights when shading is activated as a function of the classification of daylight availability
and of the maintained illuminance for different orientations and surface slopes
Surface
Orientation Lowa Mediuma Strong a
slope
Horizontal 0° 0,99 0,99 0,89 0,75 0,58 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,94 0,89 1,00 0,99 0,99 0,97 0,95
30° 1,00 1,00 0,94 0,83 0,66 1,00 0,99 0,99 0,98 0,94 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,99 0,98
45° 1,00 1,00 0,94 0,82 0,64 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,94 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,99 0,98
South
60° 1,00 1,00 0,92 0,76 0,58 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,96 0,92 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,98
90° 1,00 1,00 0,74 0,53 0,40 1,00 0,99 0,95 0,85 0,74 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,95 0,89
30° 0,99 0,99 0,89 0,78 0,62 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,89 1,00 0,99 0,99 0,97 0,95
South-East/ 45° 0,99 0,99 0,87 0,76 0,60 1,00 0,98 0,95 0,91 0,87 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,95 0,93
South-West 60° 1,00 1,00 0,86 0,74 0,57 1,00 0,99 0,95 0,91 0,86 1,00 1,00 0,98 0,95 0,92
90° 0,99 0,99 0,81 0,60 0,45 1,00 0,98 0,94 0,88 0,81 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,94 0,90
30° 1,00 1,00 0,84 0,70 0,55 1,00 0,99 0,95 0,90 0,84 1,00 1,00 0,98 0,95 0,92
45° 1,00 1,00 0,83 0,69 0,54 1,00 0,99 0,95 0,90 0,83 1,00 1,00 0,98 0,95 0,92
East/ West
60° 1,00 1,00 0,82 0,67 0,52 1,00 0,98 0,95 0,89 0,82 1,00 1,00 0,98 0,95 0,91
90° 1,00 1,00 0,76 0,57 0,43 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,76 1,00 1,00 0,97 0,93 0,88
30° 0,99 0,99 0,78 0,61 0,46 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,86 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
North-East/ 45° 0,99 0,99 0,74 0,57 0,43 1,00 0,97 0,91 0,83 0,74 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,91 0,86
North-West 60° 0,99 0,99 0,69 0,50 0,38 1,00 0,96 0,89 0,78 0,69 1,00 0,99 0,95 0,89 0,82
90° 0,98 0,98 0,60 0,41 0,31 1,00 0,94 0,85 0,72 0,60 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,77
30° 0,99 0,99 0,77 0,57 0,43 1,00 0,97 0,92 0,85 0,77 1,00 0,99 0,96 0,92 0,88
45° 0,99 0,99 0,70 0,47 0,35 1,00 0,98 0,92 0,83 0,70 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,92 0,87
North
60° 0,99 0,99 0,53 0,35 0,26 0,99 0,98 0,90 0,70 0,53 0,99 0,99 0,97 0,90 0,78
90° 1,00 1,00 0,27 0,18 0,14 1,00 0,90 0,55 0,36 0,27 1,00 1,00 0,82 0,55 0,41
107
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table F.8 — BRATISLAVA: Daylight supply factor FD,SNA,j for rooflights when shading is not activated as a function of the classification of daylight
Surface
slope
Horizontal 0° 0,91 0,79 0,66 0,53 0,42 0,94 0,88 0,81 0,72 0,64 0,95 0,91 0,87 0,81 0,75
30° 0,91 0,78 0,65 0,52 0,41 0,94 0,87 0,80 0,71 0,62 0,95 0,91 0,86 0,80 0,74
45° 0,90 0,76 0,63 0,48 0,37 0,93 0,86 0,78 0,68 0,60 0,95 0,90 0,85 0,78 0,72
South
60° 0,89 0,73 0,59 0,44 0,34 0,93 0,84 0,75 0,65 0,56 0,94 0,89 0,83 0,76 0,69
90° 0,87 0,65 0,48 0,33 0,25 0,91 0,79 0,68 0,55 0,44 0,93 0,86 0,78 0,68 0,60
30° 0,91 0,78 0,65 0,51 0,40 0,94 0,87 0,79 0,70 0,62 0,95 0,91 0,86 0,80 0,74
South-East 45° 0,91 0,75 0,62 0,47 0,37 0,93 0,86 0,77 0,67 0,59 0,95 0,90 0,85 0,78 0,71
/
South-West 60° 0,90 0,73 0,58 0,43 0,33 0,93 0,85 0,75 0,64 0,55 0,94 0,89 0,84 0,76 0,68
90° 0,88 0,66 0,48 0,33 0,25 0,92 0,81 0,69 0,55 0,44 0,94 0,87 0,79 0,70 0,61
30° 0,91 0,77 0,63 0,50 0,39 0,94 0,87 0,79 0,69 0,60 0,95 0,91 0,86 0,79 0,73
45° 0,91 0,75 0,60 0,45 0,35 0,94 0,87 0,77 0,66 0,56 0,95 0,91 0,86 0,78 0,70
East / West
60° 0,91 0,72 0,56 0,40 0,31 0,94 0,86 0,75 0,63 0,52 0,95 0,91 0,85 0,76 0,67
90° 0,89 0,66 0,46 0,31 0,23 0,93 0,82 0,68 0,54 0,42 0,95 0,89 0,80 0,70 0,59
30° 0,92 0,76 0,62 0,48 0,37 0,94 0,87 0,78 0,67 0,59 0,95 0,91 0,86 0,79 0,72
North-East 45° 0,92 0,74 0,58 0,43 0,33 0,94 0,87 0,76 0,64 0,55 0,96 0,92 0,86 0,77 0,69
/
North-West 60° 0,92 0,72 0,54 0,39 0,29 0,95 0,87 0,75 0,62 0,51 0,96 0,92 0,86 0,76 0,67
90° 0,90 0,67 0,45 0,31 0,23 0,94 0,83 0,70 0,54 0,42 0,95 0,90 0,82 0,71 0,60
30° 0,92 0,75 0,61 0,47 0,37 0,94 0,88 0,77 0,67 0,58 0,96 0,92 0,87 0,78 0,71
45° 0,92 0,73 0,56 0,42 0,32 0,95 0,87 0,75 0,63 0,53 0,96 0,92 0,86 0,76 0,68
North
60° 0,92 0,72 0,53 0,38 0,29 0,95 0,87 0,75 0,61 0,50 0,96 0,92 0,85 0,76 0,67
90° 0,91 0,67 0,45 0,30 0,23 0,94 0,84 0,71 0,54 0,41 0,96 0,90 0,82 0,72 0,60
108
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table F.9 — BRATISLAVA: Daylight supply factor FD,SA,j for rooflights when shading is activated as a function of the classification of daylight
Surface
slope
Horizontal 0° 1,00 0,95 0,85 0,70 0,54 1,00 0,99 0,96 0,92 0,85 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,96 0,94
30° 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,82 0,66 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,98
45° 1,00 0,98 0,94 0,82 0,65 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,94 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,98
South
60° 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,80 0,62 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,96 0,93 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,97
90° 1,00 0,95 0,83 0,60 0,45 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,91 0,83 1,00 1,00 0,98 0,97 0,93
30° 1,00 0,96 0,89 0,76 0,61 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,94 0,89 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,95
South-East 45° 0,99 0,95 0,88 0,76 0,60 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88 1,00 0,99 0,99 0,97 0,94
/South-
West 60° 0,99 0,95 0,87 0,74 0,58 1,00 0,98 0,96 0,92 0,87 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,96 0,94
90° 0,99 0,93 0,82 0,62 0,46 1,00 0,99 0,95 0,89 0,82 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,95 0,91
30° 0,99 0,92 0,81 0,66 0,51 1,00 0,98 0,94 0,88 0,81 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,94 0,90
45° 1,00 0,92 0,81 0,66 0,51 1,00 0,99 0,95 0,88 0,81 1,00 1,00 0,98 0,95 0,90
East / West
60° 1,00 0,91 0,79 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,99 0,94 0,87 0,79 1,00 1,00 0,98 0,94 0,89
90° 1,00 0,91 0,76 0,56 0,42 1,00 0,99 0,94 0,85 0,76 1,00 1,00 0,98 0,94 0,88
30° 0,99 0,87 0,73 0,55 0,41 1,00 0,97 0,91 0,82 0,73 1,00 0,99 0,96 0,91 0,85
North-East 45° 0,99 0,84 0,68 0,49 0,37 1,00 0,96 0,88 0,78 0,68 1,00 0,99 0,95 0,88 0,81
/
North-West 60° 0,99 0,84 0,66 0,46 0,35 0,99 0,96 0,89 0,77 0,66 0,99 0,99 0,95 0,89 0,81
90° 0,98 0,79 0,55 0,37 0,27 0,99 0,95 0,86 0,70 0,55 0,99 0,98 0,94 0,86 0,75
30° 0,98 0,87 0,71 0,49 0,37 0,99 0,96 0,90 0,82 0,71 0,99 0,98 0,95 0,90 0,85
45° 0,99 0,86 0,58 0,39 0,29 0,99 0,98 0,92 0,76 0,58 0,99 0,99 0,97 0,92 0,81
North
60° 0,99 0,64 0,39 0,26 0,19 0,99 0,95 0,76 0,52 0,39 0,99 0,99 0,93 0,76 0,58
90° 0,94 0,33 0,20 0,13 0,10 1,00 0,65 0,39 0,26 0,20 1,00 0,94 0,59 0,39 0,29
109
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table F.10 — LONDON: Daylight supply factor FD,SNA,j for rooflights when shading is not activated as a function of the classification of daylight
Surface Lowa Mediuma Strong a
Orientation
slope 100 lx 300 lx 500 lx 750 lx 1 000 l 100 lx 300 lx 500 lx 750 lx 1 000 l 100 lx 300 lx 500 lx 750 lx 1 000 lx
x x
Horizontal 0° 0,91 0,79 0,67 0,54 0,44 0,94 0,87 0,80 0,72 0,64 0,95 0,91 0,87 0,81 0,75
30° 0,91 0,78 0,65 0,52 0,42 0,94 0,87 0,79 0,70 0,62 0,95 0,91 0,86 0,80 0,74
45° 0,90 0,76 0,62 0,49 0,39 0,94 0,86 0,77 0,68 0,59 0,95 0,90 0,85 0,78 0,72
South
60° 0,89 0,73 0,58 0,45 0,35 0,93 0,84 0,75 0,64 0,55 0,95 0,89 0,83 0,76 0,69
90° 0,86 0,64 0,48 0,33 0,25 0,91 0,79 0,67 0,54 0,44 0,93 0,85 0,77 0,68 0,59
30° 0,91 0,77 0,65 0,52 0,42 0,94 0,87 0,79 0,70 0,62 0,95 0,91 0,86 0,80 0,74
South-East
45° 0,90 0,75 0,62 0,48 0,38 0,94 0,85 0,77 0,67 0,59 0,95 0,90 0,85 0,78 0,71
/
South-West 60° 0,89 0,73 0,58 0,44 0,34 0,93 0,84 0,75 0,64 0,55 0,95 0,89 0,83 0,76 0,68
90° 0,87 0,65 0,47 0,33 0,25 0,92 0,80 0,67 0,54 0,44 0,94 0,86 0,78 0,68 0,59
30° 0,91 0,76 0,63 0,51 0,41 0,94 0,86 0,78 0,69 0,61 0,95 0,91 0,86 0,79 0,73
45° 0,91 0,74 0,60 0,46 0,37 0,94 0,86 0,77 0,66 0,57 0,95 0,90 0,85 0,77 0,70
East / West
60° 0,90 0,72 0,56 0,42 0,32 0,94 0,85 0,74 0,62 0,53 0,95 0,90 0,83 0,75 0,67
90° 0,88 0,64 0,46 0,32 0,24 0,93 0,81 0,67 0,54 0,43 0,95 0,87 0,79 0,69 0,59
30° 0,91 0,76 0,62 0,49 0,39 0,94 0,87 0,78 0,68 0,59 0,96 0,91 0,86 0,78 0,72
North-East
45° 0,91 0,73 0,58 0,45 0,35 0,94 0,86 0,76 0,64 0,55 0,96 0,91 0,85 0,77 0,69
/
60° 0,91 0,71 0,54 0,40 0,31 0,94 0,85 0,74 0,61 0,51 0,96 0,91 0,84 0,75 0,66
North-West
90° 0,89 0,64 0,45 0,31 0,23 0,93 0,81 0,67 0,53 0,42 0,95 0,88 0,80 0,69 0,58
30° 0,92 0,75 0,61 0,48 0,39 0,95 0,86 0,77 0,67 0,58 0,96 0,91 0,85 0,77 0,71
45° 0,91 0,73 0,57 0,44 0,35 0,95 0,85 0,75 0,63 0,54 0,96 0,91 0,84 0,76 0,68
North
60° 0,91 0,71 0,54 0,40 0,31 0,95 0,85 0,74 0,61 0,51 0,96 0,91 0,84 0,75 0,66
90° 0,89 0,65 0,45 0,31 0,23 0,94 0,82 0,68 0,53 0,42 0,95 0,89 0,80 0,69 0,58
110
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table F.11 — LONDON: Daylight supply factor FD,SA,j for rooflights when shading is activated as a function of the classification of daylight availability
Surface
slope
Horizontal 0° 0,99 0,90 0,80 0,64 0,48 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,86 0,80 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
30° 0,99 0,97 0,90 0,77 0,61 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,95 0,90 1,00 0,99 0,99 0,98 0,96
45° 1,00 0,97 0,92 0,78 0,62 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,96 0,92 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,97
South
60° 1,00 0,97 0,91 0,77 0,59 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,95 0,91 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,97
90° 1,00 0,94 0,82 0,60 0,45 1,00 0,99 0,96 0,90 0,82 1,00 1,00 0,98 0,96 0,93
30° 0,99 0,94 0,85 0,71 0,56 1,00 0,98 0,95 0,91 0,85 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,95 0,92
South-East / 45° 0,99 0,94 0,85 0,72 0,57 1,00 0,98 0,96 0,91 0,85 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,96 0,93
South-West 60° 0,99 0,93 0,84 0,71 0,55 1,00 0,97 0,95 0,90 0,84 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,95 0,92
90° 0,99 0,92 0,80 0,60 0,45 1,00 0,98 0,94 0,88 0,80 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,94 0,90
30° 0,99 0,88 0,76 0,62 0,47 1,00 0,97 0,92 0,84 0,76 1,00 0,99 0,96 0,92 0,86
45° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
East / West
60° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
90° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
30° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
North-East / 45° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
North-West 60° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
90° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
30° 0,99 0,88 0,69 0,47 0,35 0,99 0,97 0,92 0,82 0,69 0,99 0,99 0,96 0,92 0,86
45° 0,98 0,80 0,51 0,34 0,26 0,99 0,96 0,86 0,67 0,51 0,99 0,98 0,94 0,86 0,75
North
60° 0,99 0,57 0,34 0,23 0,17 0,99 0,92 0,67 0,45 0,34 0,99 0,99 0,88 0,67 0,51
90° 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00
111
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table F.12 — LYON: Daylight supply factor FD,SNA,j for rooflights when shading is not activated as a function of the classification of daylight
Surface
slope
Horizontal 0° 0,94 0,85 0,73 0,60 0,48 0,97 0,92 0,86 0,78 0,70 0,98 0,94 0,91 0,87 0,82
30° 0,94 0,84 0,72 0,58 0,46 0,97 0,91 0,85 0,77 0,69 0,98 0,94 0,90 0,86 0,80
45° 0,94 0,82 0,69 0,54 0,42 0,96 0,90 0,83 0,74 0,66 0,98 0,93 0,89 0,84 0,78
South
60° 0,93 0,79 0,65 0,49 0,37 0,96 0,89 0,81 0,71 0,61 0,97 0,92 0,88 0,82 0,75
90° 0,90 0,71 0,53 0,36 0,27 0,94 0,84 0,73 0,60 0,49 0,96 0,90 0,83 0,74 0,66
30° 0,94 0,83 0,71 0,57 0,45 0,97 0,91 0,85 0,77 0,68 0,98 0,94 0,90 0,85 0,80
South-East 45° 0,94 0,81 0,68 0,53 0,41 0,96 0,90 0,83 0,74 0,65 0,98 0,93 0,89 0,84 0,78
/
South-West 60° 0,93 0,79 0,63 0,48 0,36 0,96 0,89 0,81 0,70 0,60 0,97 0,93 0,88 0,82 0,74
90° 0,91 0,72 0,52 0,36 0,27 0,95 0,85 0,74 0,60 0,48 0,96 0,91 0,84 0,75 0,66
30° 0,94 0,83 0,70 0,56 0,44 0,97 0,91 0,84 0,75 0,67 0,98 0,94 0,90 0,85 0,79
45° 0,94 0,81 0,66 0,51 0,39 0,97 0,91 0,83 0,72 0,63 0,98 0,94 0,90 0,83 0,76
East / West
60° 0,94 0,78 0,62 0,45 0,35 0,96 0,90 0,81 0,68 0,58 0,98 0,93 0,89 0,82 0,73
90° 0,92 0,71 0,51 0,35 0,26 0,95 0,87 0,74 0,59 0,47 0,97 0,92 0,85 0,76 0,65
30° 0,94 0,82 0,69 0,54 0,43 0,97 0,91 0,84 0,75 0,66 0,98 0,94 0,91 0,85 0,78
North-East 45° 0,94 0,80 0,64 0,49 0,38 0,97 0,91 0,82 0,71 0,61 0,98 0,94 0,90 0,83 0,76
/
North-West 60° 0,94 0,78 0,60 0,44 0,33 0,97 0,90 0,81 0,67 0,56 0,98 0,94 0,90 0,82 0,73
90° 0,93 0,71 0,50 0,34 0,25 0,96 0,87 0,74 0,58 0,46 0,97 0,93 0,86 0,76 0,65
30° 0,95 0,82 0,68 0,54 0,43 0,97 0,91 0,84 0,74 0,65 0,98 0,94 0,91 0,84 0,78
45° 0,95 0,80 0,64 0,48 0,37 0,97 0,91 0,82 0,70 0,60 0,98 0,94 0,90 0,83 0,75
North
60° 0,95 0,77 0,59 0,43 0,32 0,97 0,90 0,80 0,66 0,55 0,98 0,94 0,90 0,81 0,72
90° 0,94 0,72 0,49 0,33 0,25 0,96 0,88 0,75 0,58 0,46 0,97 0,93 0,87 0,76 0,65
112
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table F.13 — LYON: Daylight supply factor FD,SA,j for rooflights when shading is activated as a function of the classification of daylight availability
Surface
slope
Horizontal 0° 1,00 0,97 0,89 0,74 0,57 1,00 1,00 0,98 0,95 0,89 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,96
30° 1,00 0,99 0,95 0,84 0,67 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,98 0,95 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,99
45° 1,00 0,99 0,95 0,84 0,66 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,95 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,99
South
60° 1,00 0,99 0,94 0,80 0,62 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,98 0,94 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,99
90° 1,00 0,94 0,80 0,58 0,43 1,00 1,00 0,96 0,90 0,80 1,00 1,00 0,99 0,96 0,92
30° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
South-East 45° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
/
South-West 60° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
90° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
30° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
45° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
East / West
60° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
90° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
30° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
North-East 45° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
/
North-West 60° 0,99 0,85 0,67 0,47 0,35 1,00 0,97 0,89 0,78 0,67 1,00 0,99 0,96 0,89 0,82
90° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
30° 0,99 0,89 0,73 0,52 0,39 1,00 0,97 0,92 0,83 0,73 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,92 0,87
45° 0,99 0,84 0,60 0,40 0,30 1,00 0,97 0,88 0,76 0,60 1,00 0,99 0,95 0,88 0,81
North
60° 0,99 0,72 0,43 0,29 0,22 0,99 0,97 0,83 0,58 0,43 0,99 0,99 0,96 0,83 0,65
90° 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00
113
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table F.14 — STOCKHOLM: Daylight supply factor FD,SNA,j for rooflights when shading is not activated as a function of the classification of daylight
Surface
slope
Horizontal 0° 0,80 0,64 0,53 0,41 0,32 0,85 0,74 0,66 0,58 0,51 0,87 0,80 0,73 0,67 0,61
30° 0,80 0,63 0,52 0,40 0,31 0,85 0,73 0,65 0,57 0,49 0,87 0,79 0,72 0,66 0,60
45° 0,78 0,62 0,49 0,37 0,28 0,84 0,72 0,63 0,55 0,47 0,86 0,78 0,71 0,64 0,58
South
60° 0,77 0,59 0,46 0,33 0,25 0,83 0,70 0,61 0,51 0,43 0,86 0,76 0,69 0,62 0,55
90° 0,73 0,52 0,36 0,25 0,19 0,80 0,65 0,54 0,43 0,34 0,84 0,72 0,64 0,55 0,47
30° 0,80 0,63 0,52 0,39 0,30 0,85 0,73 0,65 0,56 0,49 0,87 0,79 0,72 0,66 0,60
South-East 45° 0,79 0,61 0,49 0,36 0,28 0,84 0,72 0,63 0,54 0,46 0,87 0,78 0,71 0,64 0,58
/
South-West 60° 0,78 0,59 0,45 0,33 0,25 0,83 0,71 0,61 0,51 0,43 0,86 0,77 0,69 0,62 0,55
90° 0,75 0,53 0,37 0,25 0,19 0,81 0,67 0,56 0,43 0,34 0,85 0,74 0,66 0,56 0,48
30° 0,80 0,62 0,50 0,38 0,29 0,85 0,73 0,64 0,55 0,47 0,87 0,79 0,72 0,65 0,59
45° 0,80 0,61 0,47 0,35 0,26 0,85 0,73 0,63 0,53 0,44 0,88 0,79 0,72 0,64 0,57
East / West
60° 0,79 0,59 0,44 0,31 0,23 0,85 0,72 0,61 0,50 0,41 0,88 0,78 0,71 0,62 0,54
90° 0,77 0,53 0,36 0,24 0,18 0,84 0,69 0,56 0,43 0,33 0,87 0,76 0,67 0,57 0,48
30° 0,81 0,61 0,48 0,36 0,27 0,86 0,73 0,63 0,53 0,45 0,88 0,80 0,72 0,63 0,57
North-East 45° 0,81 0,60 0,46 0,33 0,25 0,87 0,73 0,63 0,52 0,43 0,89 0,80 0,72 0,63 0,56
/
North-West 60° 0,81 0,59 0,43 0,30 0,22 0,87 0,73 0,62 0,49 0,40 0,89 0,80 0,72 0,63 0,54
90° 0,78 0,54 0,35 0,23 0,18 0,85 0,70 0,56 0,42 0,32 0,88 0,77 0,68 0,58 0,48
30° 0,81 0,60 0,47 0,35 0,27 0,86 0,73 0,62 0,53 0,45 0,88 0,80 0,71 0,63 0,56
45° 0,81 0,59 0,45 0,32 0,24 0,87 0,73 0,62 0,51 0,42 0,89 0,80 0,71 0,62 0,55
North
60° 0,82 0,61 0,44 0,30 0,23 0,88 0,75 0,63 0,51 0,40 0,90 0,81 0,73 0,64 0,56
90° 0,79 0,54 0,35 0,23 0,17 0,86 0,71 0,57 0,42 0,32 0,89 0,78 0,69 0,58 0,48
114
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table F.15 — STOCKHOLM: Daylight supply factor FD,SA,j for rooflights when shading is activated as a function of the classification of daylight
Surface
slope
Horizontal 0° 0,95 0,84 0,74 0,57 0,43 0,98 0,92 0,87 0,81 0,74 0,99 0,95 0,91 0,87 0,83
30° 0,99 0,92 0,84 0,72 0,56 1,00 0,98 0,94 0,89 0,84 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,94 0,91
45° 0,99 0,94 0,86 0,73 0,58 1,00 0,98 0,96 0,91 0,86 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,96 0,93
South
60° 0,99 0,94 0,86 0,73 0,56 1,00 0,99 0,96 0,91 0,86 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,96 0,93
90° 0,99 0,92 0,80 0,58 0,44 1,00 0,98 0,94 0,88 0,80 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,94 0,90
30° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
South-East 45° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
/
South-West 60° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
90° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
30° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
45° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
East / West
60° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
90° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
30° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
North-East 45° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
/
North-West 60° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
90° 0,99 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,49 1,00 0,98 0,93 0,85 0,78 1,00 0,99 0,97 0,93 0,88
30° 0,99 0,85 0,59 0,40 0,30 1,00 0,96 0,89 0,76 0,59 1,00 0,99 0,95 0,89 0,81
45° 0,98 0,67 0,40 0,27 0,20 0,99 0,94 0,78 0,54 0,40 0,99 0,98 0,92 0,78 0,60
North
60° 0,99 0,49 0,29 0,20 0,15 0,99 0,89 0,59 0,39 0,29 0,99 0,99 0,84 0,59 0,44
90° 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00
115
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Determination of operating times tSNA, tSA

As for vertical facades, the activation of sun shading is assumed to be equivalent with the time when
the surface/façade is sunlit. The respective values are determined from climate data, with the
assumption of a five-day (working) week, daily from 8 am to 5 pm.
Regression of the relative usable luminous exposure / daylight supply factor
Based on detailed simulations, the correlation of the daylight factor and the relative usable luminous
exposure, depending on the maintained illuminance were derived, as depicted in the following figures
with sunshading not activated. The standard’s tables resulted from the graphs in Figure 15.
Sun shading not activated
Inclination
South North
γF
0°
45 °
90 °
Key
X daylight factor (%)
Y relative luminous exposure
Figure F.15 — Correlation of the daylight factor D with the relative luminous exposure HN,SNA,rel
(or FD,S,SA) for facade orientation 0 ° (north) and 180 ° (south) and various facade slopes. The
relations are given for E=100 lx, 300 lx, 500 lx, 750lx, 1 000 lx.
116
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
F.4.4 Example
The following example describes how the daylight supply of a production hall receiving daylight only
through rooflights is calculated. Two different skylight solutions are discussed. One of the variants
involves roof openings fitted with strip type skylights; shed rooflights are used in the other variant.
The entire hall floor area is considered to be lit by daylight. It is therefore assumed that there is only
one area to be evaluated. Furthermore, both systems are assumed to have no sun shading system.
a) Strip-type skylights b) Shed-rooflights
c) Cross-section of strip-type skylight d) Cross-section of shed-rooflight
Figure F.16 — Examples of rooflight designs
117
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table F.16a — Benchmark values for luminous transmittances U, g, τD65 for different plastic
glazing materials often used in rooflights
“A” individual rooflight, glazed, “B” continuous rooflight, glazed.
U g τD65
Type composition type
[W/(m²K)] [-] [-]
Acrylic glazing, double skin clear 2,7 0,78 0,80
Acrylic glazing, double skin opal/clear 2,7 0,72 0,73
Acrylic glazing, triple skin clear 1,8 0,66 0,68
A opal/opal/
Acrylic glazing, triple skin clear 1,8 0,64 0,60
opal/clear
/
Acrylic glazing, quadruple skin clear/opal 1,5 0,63 0,63
Polycarbonate-structured-sheet, quadruple skin, 10
mm clear 2,5 0,65 0,68
mm opal 2,5 0,59 0,50
Polycarbonate-structured-sheet, triple skin, 16 mm clear 2,3 0,78 0,74
Polycarbonate-structured-sheet, triple skin, 16 mm opal 2,3 0,69 0,63
Polycarbonate-structured-sheet, quintuple skin, 16
mm clear 1,9 0,58 0,59
mm opal 1,9 0,52 0,45
Polycarbonate-structured-sheet, sextuple skin, 16
mm opal 1,85 0,47 0,42
Polycarbonate-structured-sheet, sevenfold skin, 16
mm clear 1,8 0,65 0,64
B
Polycarbonate-structured-sheet, sevenfold skin, 16
mm opal 1,8 0,58 0,54
mm clear 1,8 0,70 0,64
mm opal 1,8 0,46 0,44
mm clear 1,7 0,62 0,68
mm opal 1,7 0,53 0,45
mm clear 1,45 0,67 0,62
mm opal 1,45 0,46 0,44
118
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table F.16b — Benchmark values for luminous transmittances U, g, τD65 for different glass type
glazing materials often used in rooflights
“A” individual rooflight glazed, “B” continuous rooflight, glazed.
Type Composition type U g τD65
W/(m2K)
A 4 mm float glass 16 mm air
4 mm float glass Clear double pane 2,8 0,79 0,81
A 4 mm toughened glass 16 mm Argon Clear double pane
4 mm float glass w. coating Low-e 1,2 0,59 0,76
A 4 mm toughened glass 14 mm Argon Clear double pane
33.1 laminated float glass Low-e 1,2 0,54 0,75
A 4 mm toughened 14 mm air Clear double pane
33.1 laminated float glass w. coating Low-e, Sun protection 1,2 0,27 0,42
B Laminated glass 6,2 Clear 2,7 0,67 0,77
16 mm air, 6 mm float glass
B Laminated glass 6,2 Coated, silver 1,1 0,52 0,72
16 mm argon, 6 mm float glass
B 6 mm toughened glass (extra clear) Clear double pane 1,5 0,61 0,79
18mm Argon, 33,1 laminated float glass
B 6 mm toughened glass (green) Clear double pane 1,5 0,38 0,64
18 mm Argon, 33,1 laminated float glass
B 6 mm toughened glass (grey) Clear double pane 1,5 0,34 0,39
B 6 mm toughened glass (extra clear) Clear double pane 1,5 0,55 0,78
119
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Mean daylight factor for strip-type rooflights

The daylight factor is calculated using the standards Formula (F.17). The following values apply to the
glazing of the strip skylight:
— transmittance of glazing: τD65 = 0,64 (double-wall (PC) polycarbonate multiwall sheets);
— reduction factor for frames and subdivisions of the glazing: kObl,1 = 0,92;
— reduction factor for pollution of the glazing: kObl,2 = 0,9;
— reduction factor for non-vertical light incidence: kObl,3 = 0,85.
The strip-skylight geometry has the following characteristics:

— height of the supporting frame: hs = 0,5 m;
— slope of the supporting frame: γw = 90°; (vertical);
— width of a strip skylight: bs = 2 m;
— length of a strip skylight: as = 10 m.
By inserting the geometry data of the strip skylight and the previously-determined space index to
obtain the input values for as/bs = 5, hs/bs = 0,25; γw = 90° and k = 2,93, the space utilance ηR value
listed in the standard’s Table F.9 is found to be 0,88 (interpolated). Since the roof is horizontal, the
external daylight factor Da is 100 %. The total raw roof opening area ACa of the 12 skylights is 240 m2.
The hall floor area totally lit by daylight AD is 1 350 m2. The mean daylight factor is therefore
D =Da ⋅τ D65 ⋅ kObl,1 ⋅ kObl,2 ⋅ kObl,3 ⋅

∑A
Ca
⋅ηR in % (standard Formula F.17)
AD
240 m 2
D=
1 ⋅ 0, 64 ⋅ 0,92 ⋅ 0,9 ⋅ 0,85 ⋅ ⋅ 0,88 =7, 05%
1350 m 2
The daylight availability being larger than 7 % is classified as being strong.

Mean daylight factor for shed-rooflights
The following values apply to the glazing of the long rectangular skylight:
— transmittance of glazing: τD65 = 0,7;
— reduction factor for frames and subdivisions of the glazing: kObl,1 = 0,88;
— reduction factor for pollution of the glazing: kObl,2 = 0,90;
— reduction factor for non-vertical light incidence: kObl,3 = 0,85.
The shed-rooflight geometry has the following characteristics:

— slope of the glazed shed area: γF = 60°;
120
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
— slope of the opaque shed area: γF = 30°;
— height of the total area containing the light-transmitting opening: hw = 1,5 m;
— height (raw roof opening) of the opening through which light enters: hg = 1 m;
— width (raw roof opening) of the opening through which light enters: bCA = 30 m.
By inserting the geometry data of the shed-rooflight and the previously-determined space index to
obtain the input values: hg/hw = 0,67, γw = 60° and k = 2,93, the space utilance ηR value listed in the
standard’s Table F.10 is found to be 0,8 (interpolated). For a 60° slope of the area through which the
daylight enters, the standard’s Table A.8 gives an external daylight factor of 0,72 %. The total raw roof
opening area ACa of the eight skylights is 240 m². The mean daylight factor is therefore
D =Da ⋅τ D65 ⋅ kObl,1 ⋅ kObl,2 ⋅ kObl,3 ⋅

∑A
Ca
⋅ηR in % (standard Formula F.17)
AD
240 m 2
D = 0, 72 ⋅ 0, 7 ⋅ 0,88 ⋅ 0,9 ⋅ 0,85 ⋅ ⋅ 0,8 = 4,83%
1350 m 2
With a value of in between 4 % and 7 %, the daylight availability according to the standard’s Table
F.11 is classified as "medium".
Daylight supply factor FD,s for strip-type rooflights
The standard’s Table F.14 gives a value of 0,92 for the daylight availability factor FD,S for the
respective set of table input values: daylight availability class "strong", orientation "horizontal" and
maintained illuminance Em = 500 lx .
Daylight supply factor FD,s for shed-rooflights

The standard’s Table F.14 gives a value of 0,78 for the daylight availability factor FD,S for the
respective set of table input values: daylight availability class "medium", orientation "north-facing",
surface slope 60° and maintained illuminance Em = 500 lx.
F.5Daylight Responsive Control Systems

The usable luminous exposure is an evaluation parameter for the optimum achievable potential of
saving electrical energy for lighting purposes (in the ideal case). Regarding actual lighting systems,
however, some power losses of the ballast devices and some losses due to non-ideal control
performance have to be considered. As illustrated in the standard in Figure F.1 and described in F.2,
this situation can be explained by introducing the concept of the 'system potential' SP [F4]. The system
potential presents an energy efficiency (or utilization) factor to describe the need for complementing
the available daylight by artificial lighting in order to achieve the required maintained illuminance
during the daylight operating time tD of the lighting system. Measured system potentials of standard,
daylight-responsive lighting control systems (constant illumination control) range between values of
0,8 and 0,9.
If the lighting system is manually operated, and hence no electronic lighting control systems are
involved, SP can be interpreted as the energy-effective influence of the manual switching behaviour. In
this case, it is a statistical value, as the actual user behaviour (apart from the preferred level of
illumination) varies significantly depending on other cause variables like glare sensitivity and
121
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
perception of contrast, workplace design, type and position of the daylight aperture, age of the user,
usage patterns etc. For instance, it happens quite often that people will switch on the artificial light in
the early morning when they start working and daylight supply is still weak. As the level of natural
lighting rapidly rises in the course of the day and eventually significantly exceeds the level of artificial
lighting, people will no longer perceive that the electric light is actually switched on: the system will
not be turned off and thus contributes to raise the energy demand quite unnecessarily. Estimates of
system potentials in association with exclusively manual operation are therefore generally much more
conservative. Regarding the modelling of influences due to user behaviour there are hence still
substantial uncertainties, which should be clarified by future investigations aiming to obtain more
differentiated SP values for manual control scenarios.
F.6Monthly evaluation method

For various reasons it may become necessary to provide characteristic daylighting values on a
monthly basis, e.g. to consider seasonal differences in the internal heat gains due to lighting in the
overall thermal balance. For this purpose, the annual values of the relative luminous exposure HN,rel
can be taken into account via distribution key factors, which consider the seasonal variations in
daylight supplies.
In Figure F.17 there is an example illustration of the monthly distributions of the relative luminous
exposure for typical facade systems. In months with intensive radiation, light-redirecting systems will
use the available direct light clearly better. Compared to this, facade systems featuring conventional
solar radiation protection and/or glare protection louvers (like close-slatted blinds or solar control
glazing with sunblind foil) have a seasonal performance that is less pronounced. In months with higher
radiation levels these systems will achieve a comparatively strong reduction of the light transmission
into the building.
122
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
a) Blinds (reference system)
b) Sunblind foil with solar control glass
c) Blinds and light-guiding glass
Key
X Month
Y Relative luminous exposure [%]
HN, SA, rel, eff (activated)
HN, SNa, rel, eff (not activated)
Figure F.17 — Comparison of the effective, relative monthly luminous exposure for a
maintained illuminance of 500 lx (for modes: sunshading device activated, sunshading device
not activated) for the following systems: blinds (reference system), sunblind foil with solar
control glass SSG and blinds and light re-directing glass
123
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
These different kinds of seasonal distribution are appropriately considered by means of the
distribution key factors described in Figure F.18 In the case of light-redirecting systems, it will again
be distinguished between the geographic direction South and the directions East/West (depending on
the given orientation). South facing facades receive more direct radiation (which is required for
efficient light re-direction) than facades with an East/West orientation. This is why the seasonal
performance of south facing facades with light re-directing devices is more pronounced.
The monthly distribution for rooflights follows the key factors of light-redirecting, vertical facades,
which also use the direct light well.
Key
X month
Y distribution key
1 glare protection
2 + light-guiding (South)
3 + light-guiding (East/West)
Figure F.18 — Monthly distribution key for the relative annual luminous exposure of vertical
facades
F.7Determination of daytime and night time hours

The provided method is based on the evaluation of the astronomic Formulae describing the sun path.
F.8Comprehensive calculation
As described in the standard, the impact of daylight utilization on the energy demand for electric
lighting can alternatively be calculated comprehensively by applying respective validated software
tools, with appropriate weather datasets. CIE Report 171:2006 provides further information on
software verification.
F.9 Light pipes

Additional energy savings may be obtained when utilizing daylight pipes (or tubular daylight guidance
systems). Light pipes allow daylight to be directed through most attic obstructions as well as they can
124
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
provide daylight through one or more stories to dark areas of a building, where the light from
conventional facade or roof light systems cannot reach. Light pipes are basically a metal or plastic tube
that delivers daylight from the roof into the building.
The typical light pipe includes:
a) a roof-mounted plastic dome or a glazed window frame which captures sunlight;
b) a reflective tube that stretches from the dome to the interior ceiling and
c) a ceiling-mounted diffuser that spreads the light to the room.
There are a number of systems available: Either with flexible reflective tubes or with rigid reflective
tubes.
F.10 References
[F1] Réglementation Thermique 2000, Annexe N° 1 A L’Arrêté Portant Approbation Des Méthodes
de Calcul Th-C et Th-E, Méthode de Calcul Th-C. CSTB, Paris, Internetseite unter
www.rt2000.net (2004).
[F2] de Boer, J.; Erhorn, H.: Ein einfaches Modell zur Klassifizierung der Tageslichtversorgung von
Innenräumen mit vertikalen Fassaden. gi Gesundheits-ingenieur 125, H. 6, S. 281-295.
[F3] Dirksmöller,M.; Erhorn, H.: Adeline 3.0 – Dokumentation. Fraunhofer-Institut für Bauphysik,
Stuttgart (1999).
[F4] Knoop, T.; Tageslichtabhängige Beleuchtungssysteme auf der Basis von Installationsbussen;
Dissertation TU Berlin, erschienen in Fortschr.-Ber. VDI Reihe 6 Nr. 396, Düsseldorf: VDI Verlag,
ISBN 3-18-339606-8; 1998.
[F5] de Boer, J.: Tageslichtbeleuchtung und Kunstlichteinsatz in Verwaltungsbauten mit
unterschiedlichen Fassaden, Dissertation, Universität Stuttgart, Fraunhofer IRB Verlag,
Stuttgart.
[F6] de Boer, J., Mergenthaler, K.: A simple general method to rate daylight supply of indoor spaces
with vertical façades. IBP Report WB 154/20112, Stuttgart, March 2011.
[F7] David, R.; de Boer, J.; Erhorn, H.; Reiß, J.; Rouvel, L.; Schiller, H.; Weiß, N.; Wenning, M.: Heizen,
Kühlen, Belüften und Beleuchten, Bilanzierungsgrundlagen zur DIN V 18599. Fraunhofer IRB
Verlag, Stuttgart (2006).
[F8] Rattunde, R.: Optimierung der Tageslichtbeleuchtung großer Räume durch Oberlichter unter
Berücksichtigung des zur Verfügung stehenden Tageslichtes. Dissertation Technische
Universität Berlin (1980).
[F9] de Boer, J.; Cornelius, W.; Wössner, S.: Ein einfaches Modell zur Ermittlung des
Endenergiebedarfs für Beleuchtungszwecke in Räumen mit Dachoberlichtern. gi Gesundheits-
ingenieur 126, H. 3, S. 113-123.
125
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annex G
(informative)
Constant illuminance
G.1 Introduction
Constant illuminance control is a technique employed to cut out the initial excess of light output
provided by the new installation to compensate for the expected gradual decay in output over time.
The overdesign is required as the "task illuminance" is specified in terms of "maintained illuminance"
and maintained illuminance is the value below which the task illuminance should not fall. The decay
can minimized and largely recovered by carrying out frequent and regular servicing of the lighting
scheme. The decay in light output can be due to a combination of fall in lamp light output (LLMF),
lamps (failing) survival (LSF), dirt deposit on luminaire optics (LMF) and dirt deposit on room
surfaces (RSMF). The estimate of the impact of these combination of factors produces the maintenance
factor of the installation (MF). Where MF = LLMF × LSF × LMF × RSMF . Details of the process is
described by C.1.4 in Annex C where some useful data is also provided.
In cases where the lighting installation requires a fixed luminaire layout arrangement it may be
necessary to install extra luminaires. This action will result in "over-design" light levels. Correction to
the design illuminance can be made by the constant illuminance control by setting the control point to
the correct design illuminance. In this case the Fc should be corrected by "over design" factor FCOD.
Where FCOD = correct design illuminance / over-designed illuminance.
Under this condition the FC generated by Formula G.1 or G.2 or G.3 should be multiplied by FCOD.
G.2 Constant illuminance factor (Fc)

If the lighting system is based on dimmable solution that employs a photocell to detect the reflected
task illuminance than once the system is set up to provide the required illuminance the control system
will reduce the initial installed power by a predictable amount.
As the light output starts to decay the control system will raise the input power to compensate for the
loss. This activity will continue until the power required has reached the initial installed load and the
light level will be the maintained illuminance = (initial illuminance × MF). To avoid further loss at this
point the lighting installation needs to be serviced. This period of decay is one complete maintenance
cycle.
The impact of this control is made use by the Constant illuminance dependency factor Fc and the
magnitude is calculated by Formula G.1.
1
Fc =
1 − Fcc (1 − MF ) (G.1)
2
where
Fcc is the efficiency factor of the constant illuminance control system
MF is the maintenance factor of the lighting installation
The efficiency factor FCC of the control system represents the non-linear relationship between input
power and light output of certain light sources. It also represents the magnitude of the impact of the
control ripple, bias and deviation characteristics of the control system. The value of FCC can vary
126
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
between different light products and technologies and information on these should be sought from the
product suppliers.
In general the impact of Fcc is very small and the magnitude is usually taken as 1,0. Therefore Formula
G.1 may be simplified to G.2.
1 + MF
Fc = (G.2)
2
G.3 Constant lumen output system (CLO)

Constant lumen output systems are self-managed light source light output control techniques. The
control is built into the light source and is pre-programmed or contain internal signal feedback
arrangements to regulate the light output of the source. This self-regulation ensures constant light
output over the working life of the source by adjusting the power supply to the source as the source
fades in output. The lighting design is based on the constant lumen output value and the installed
power load on the required power at the end of the source life. Initially the power to the source is low
and during life it increases to feed the light source to generate the required lumen output. The
characteristics of this system is very similar to the constant illuminance control system and can
provide a similar value of constant illuminance factor Fc by using Formula G.3.
F=
c (1 )
+ LLMF / 2 (G.3)
Where LLMF is the Lamp Lumen Maintenance Factor.

Clearly the Fc value produced CLO technique is somewhat optimistic is it does not account for the
losses due to the decay by dirt deposit in the luminaire and on room surfaces. However, in clean
environments found in many buildings these losses are negligible and can be ignored.
127
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annex H
(informative)
Standby system energy requirements
H.1 Emergency lighting luminaire standby charging power (Pei)

The standby charging power Pei of the emergency lighting luminaire is the required power for trickle
charging the batteries in self-contained emergency luminaires when lamps are switched off. This
power is measured for the self-contained emergency luminaires when operating in battery charge
mode only.
The total emergency lighting luminaire standby charging power Pem for the luminaires in a room, zone
or building is found by the summation on the Pei values as shown in Formula H.1.
Pem = ∑Pei
i [W] (H.1)
H.2 Lighting controls standby power (Pci)

The standby power Ppc of the luminaire is the required power for the operation of the lighting controls
and detectors in the luminaire without operating the lamps. This power is measured for the
controllable luminaire in standby mode of operation, that is with lamps switched off.
The total luminaire control's standby power Ppc for luminaires in a room, zone or building is found by
the summation of the Pci values as shown in Formula H.2.
Ppc = ∑Pci
i [W] (H.2)
The estimated standby energy WP,t required during non-lighting periods to provide charging energy
for emergency lighting and the activation energy for lighting controls in a room or zone of the building
for time periods ts is calculated by the Formula H.3.
WP,t = ∑{(Ppc × ts) + (Pem × te)}/1 000 [kWh / ts] (H.3)
Where ts is the required time period [h]
NOTE 1 The total standby lighting energy can be estimated for any required time step period ts (hourly,
monthly or annually) in accordance with the time interval of the dependency factors used.
NOTE 2 This estimation does not include the power consumed by control systems remote from the luminaire
and not drawing power from the luminaire.
The annual standby energy (WP,t) required to provide charging energy for emergency lighting and
standby energy for automatic lighting controls in the building is calculated by using Formula H.4.
WP,t= ∑{(Ppc×ty) + (Pem×te)}/1 000 [kWh] (H.4)
Where ty is the hours in a year 8760 [h].
NOTE 1 For existing buildings, WP,t and WL,t,can be established more accurately by directly and separately
metering the energy supplied to the lighting.
NOTE 2 This estimation does not include the power consumed by control systems remote from the luminaire
and not drawing power from the luminaire. Where known this will preferably be added.
NOTE 3 The formula does not include the power consumed by a central battery emergency lighting system.
128
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annex I
(informative)
Calculation Flowchart
Figure I.1 — Flow chart illustrating the calculation of energy for lighting by method 1
129
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Figure I.2 — Flow diagram for quick method of lighting energy calculation by method 2
130
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annex J
(informative)
Calculation examples
J.1 Method 1
J.1.1 Example 1 — New design manufacturing building
Figure J.1 — Plan of the manufacturing building
Method 1 Calculation of the energy required for lighting of a new design manufacturing
building
J.1.1.1 Site details
Manufacturing building with entrance, toilets, office and production areas as shown in layout plan
Figure J.1 is located in middle England latitude 52,5°, Operating 5 days per week from 08:00 to 17:00.
131
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
J.1.1.2 Entrance details
Unmanned open plan with call desk providing entrance for staff and visitors
Size; L=8m, W=4m, H=3m, wp on floor
Full height windows and glass sliding entrance doors along the east facing façade
Surface reflectances; Ceiling 70 %, Walls 50 %, Work plane 20 %
Maintained illuminance = 300lx
Maintenance factor = 0,8
Entrance electric lighting system;
Table J.1 — Luminaires in the entrance lighting scheme
Place Luminaire Quantity Description of luminaire and control Lighting
Unique ID type and operation technique system
operation
codea
Entrance area ELA 4 36W LED recessed downlight with DALI System 1
control, Dimmable, Daylight and
Occupancy PIR linked
Entrance area ELB 2 36W LED recessed self-contained System 1
maintained emergency downlight with
DALI control, Dimmable, Daylight and
Occupancy PIR linked,
Entrance area ELC 1 1x18W fluorescent lamp self-contained System 2
maintained emergency exit sign, DALI
control
Outside ELD 1 5,6W LED light source self-contained System 3
emergency exit non-maintained emergency lighting
doors bulkhead
a The lighting system operation code for an area differentiates between the operating capabilities and
requirements of the installed luminaires.
Table J.2 — Power data of luminaires in the entrance

Luminaire Luminaire circuit Luminaire controls Luminaire standby Lighting
Unique ID power (Pi) [W] standby power (Pci) emergency battery system
[W] charge power (Pei) [W] operation
code
ELA 36 0,2 0,0 System 1
ELB 36 0,2 3,0 System 1
ELC 15,0 0,2 3,0 System 2
ELD - 0 2,0 System 3
Lighting controls –
Automatic combined constant illuminance control by dimming of the general lighting system with
photocells set to regulate at the design illuminance of 300lx and PIR presence detection in centre
responding to entry and occupancy.
132
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Lighting system dependency factors calculation and data –

Calculation of FC
General lighting system for illumination
Over design saving – due to layout arrangement requirement the 2 rows of 3 luminaires will provide
345 lx. This 13 % overdesign can be reduced by dimming to the set design illuminance value.
Therefore the energy saving benefit for the general lighting (system 1) will be FCOD1 = 300/345 = 0,87
of the installed power.
Maintenance factor compensation saving – MF = 0,8 so will be FCMF1 = 1- (1- 0,8)/2 = 0,90 Therefore
FC = FCOD1 × FCMF1 = 0,87 × 0,90 = 0,78
FC = 0,78
The emergency lighting systems
FC = 1,0 as system 2 is emergency lighting sign not dimmable
Calculation of FD
The entrance area has unobstructed east facing floor to ceiling height windows along the width
including sliding glass doors. There is no solar shading device. The glazed area is 4 m × 3 m and
contains 7 off 50 mm wide metal supporting mullions.
Table J.3 — Boundary conditions for the entrance
Parameter Variation
Length 8,0 m
Width 4,0 m
Height 3,0 m
Space geometry
Reflectance ρ, work plane 0,2
Orientation East
Obstruction (No obstructions), 0°
Façade Light transmission τD65 glazing 0,74

Framing ratio k1 1 – (7 × 3 × 0,05)/(4 × 3) = 0,91
Pollution of glazing factor k2 (Light industrial area) 0,90
Specific installed power density (6 × 36)/(8 × 4) = 6,75 W/m2

Lighting
System Continuous dimming with PIR
Control strategy
switching
Control point, position Control points in the centre area
8 am to 5 pm, Monday through
Working hours
Friday, no shut down holiday
NOTE For the calculation of specific installed power density luminaire ELC and ELD are not included as
these are exit signs or outside and not providing to the interior illumination.
133
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
The following steps will lead to the estimation of FD,S

Much of the required data need to be obtained from tables in Annex F of the standard.
Step 1;
Determine the ratio Hdir/Hglob for the entrance location
Data for sample locations are provided in Table F.2 of the standard. For specific locations can be found
by evaluation of the corresponding weather data sets of Hdir and Hglob and calculating Hdir/Hglob ratio.
Therefore from Table F.2 for near London with latitude γ˚ of 51,2˚,find Hdir/Hglob = 0,39
Step 2;
Determine tDay, which represents "sun up" and tnight , which represents "sun down" during working
hours from Table F.19 of the standard for the latitude angle. If required use linear interpolation.
Therefore from Table F.19 for latitude angle of 52,5˚,find tday = 2271h and tnight =75h
Step 3;
Determine the relative times trel,D,SNA for the non-activated protection systems as a function of the
façade orientation, the latitude γ˚ and the ratio of Hdir/Hglob from Table F.3 of the standard.
From Table F.3 for Hdir/Hglob = 0,39 and γ˚ = 51,2˚ in table East/West find trel,D,SNA = 0,82
Therefore solar shielding will be required for 2271 × (1-0,82) = 409h but no such facility in this
project.
Step 4;
Determine the daylight factor D for the entrance in the middle of the room, where the detectors are
located for the control of the required electric lighting, by first calculating DCA the daylight factor
produced by the raw building carcass and second calculating τeff,SNA is the effective transmittance value
for periods during which the protection system is not activated and finally multiplying these two
values to obtain D.
DCA is calculated by Formula F.14 from the standard where DCA = (4,13 + 20,0 ITr – 1,36IRD)ISh
Now ITr is calculated by Formula F.4 from the standard where ITr = ACA/AD, ACA is the carcass
opening 4m × 3m = 12m² and AD is calculated by Formula F.2 from the standard where AD = aD ×
bD in which aD is 2,5(hLi – hTa) being 2,5(3,0 – 0,0) = 7,5m and bD is 4m making AD = 7,5 × 4 =
30,0m2
Therefore ITr = 12/30 = 0,4
Now IRD is calculated by Formula F.5 from the standard where IRD = aD/(hLi – hTa) = 7,5/(3,0 – 0,0)
Therefore IRD = 2,5
ISh is 1,0 as in this project there are no shadings
Therefore DCA is 4,13 + (20,0 × 0,4) – (1,36 × 2,5) = 4,13 + 8 – 3,4 = 8,73 %
τeff,SNA is given by Formula F.16 from the standard as τeff,SNA = k1 × k2 × k3 × τD65,SNA where k1 is 0,91, k2 is
0,9, k3 is 0,85 from F.3.2.4 of the standard and τD65,SNA the luminous transmittance value of the glass
used in the windows 0,74 obtained from Table F.4a of this Technical Report.
Therefore τeff,SNA = 0,91 × 0,9 × 0,85 × 0,74 = 0,52
Therefore D = 8,73 × 0,52 = 4,5 %
Step 5;
134
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Determine the daylight supply factor FD,s,SNA from Table F. 5 (East/West façade) of the standard for the
geographic location 52,5o, the value of Hdir/Hglob 0,39 obtained in step 2, value of D 4,5 % obtained in
step 4 and the maintained illuminance value of 300 lx by interpolation for the specific value.
Therefore the daylight supply factor FD,S,SNA is 80 %
Step 6;
Determine the daylight dependence factor FD using Formula 7 from the standard where
FD = 1 – (FD,S,SNA × FD,C). Now FD,C is obtained from Table F.16 of the standard for control type –
automated, dimmed with standby losses and no switch on type VII system, for maintained illuminance
of 300 lx and strong daylight classification (obtained from Table F.1 of the standard for D of 4,5) is
0,77.
Therefore FD = 1 – (0,80 × 0,77) = 1 – 0,62 = 0,38
FD = 0,38
Calculation of FO
The lighting control system in the entrance area consists of automatic dimming to photocell response
and activated by PIR presence detection power switch on and off.
From Table E.1 of the standard automatic presence detection FOC = 0,90
From Table E.2 of the standard for entrance area FA = 0,0
Now FO using Formulae E.1 of the standard is FO = {1 – [(1 – FOC) × FA/0,2]} = 1,0 – 0 =1,0
FO = 1,0
System design data;

Making use of the product data with Formulae 1, 2 and 3 of the standard calculate the installed power
requirements for lighting, battery charge and controls standby as follows;
1, Power for illumination PN1 = 36 × 6 = 216W
2, Power for battery charge Pem = (3 × 2) + (3 × 1) + (2 × 1) = 11W
3, Power for controls standby Ppc = (6 × 0,2) + (1 × 0,2) = 1,4W
Summary system data;

Area System FO FD FC PN Pem Ppc tD tN te ty
Entrance 1 1,0 0,38 0,78 216 6 1,2 2271 75 8730 8760
Entrance 2 1,0 1,0 1,0 15 3 0,2 2271 75 8730 8760
Entrance 3 1,0 1,0 1,0 0,0 2 0,0 - - 8730 8760
Energy requirement calculations
Making use of Formulae 9, 10 and 11 of the standard and the system data calculate the energy
required for illumination and for standby requirements during non-lighting periods.
Annual energy required for illumination of the entrance by Formula 10 of the standard for systems
135
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
WL = {(PN1 × FC1) × FO [(tD × FD) + tN]}/1 000 + {(PN2 × FC2) × FO [(tD × FD2) + tN]}/1 000 = {(216 × 0,78) ×
1,0 × [(2271 × 0,38) + 75]}/1000 + {(15 × 1,0) × 1,0 [(2271 × 1,0) + 75]}/1 000 = 193,2
WL = 193,2 kWh/y
Annual energy required for standby lighting services in the entrance using Formula 11 of the standard
WP = {(Ppc × ty) + (Pem × te)}/1 000 = {(1,4 × 8 760) + (11 × 8 730)}/1 000 = 108,29
WP = 108,29 kWh/y
Annual energy W required for the entrance lighting system is obtained from Formula 9 of the standard
W = WL + WP = 193,2 + 108,29 = 301,49 kWh/year
Calculation of LENI
The LENI for the entrance is given by Formula 13 of the standard where LENI = W/A and A is the floor
area of the entrance area is 32 m2
LENI = 301,49/32 = 9,42 kWh/m2 per year
J.1.1.3 Toilet details
Male and Female toilets windowless but having viewing glass in the doors
Size; 2 off L=4m, W=4m, H=3m, wp on floor
Toilet electric lighting system;
The lighting system is the same in both male and female toilet areas.
Table J.4 — Luminaires in the toilet lighting scheme
Place Luminaire Quantity Description of luminaire and control Lighting system
Unique ID type and operation technique operation codea
Toilet area TLA 4 15,5 W LED surface mounted diffuser System 1
with remote DALI control on/off
Toilet area TLB 2 15,5 W LED surface mounted diffuser System 1
self-contained maintained emergency
with remote DALI control on/off
136
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table J.5 — Power data of luminaires in the toilets

Unique ID power (Pi) standby power (Pci) emergency battery system
charge power (Pei) operation
code
[W] [W] [W]
TLA 15,5 0,0 0,0 System 1
TLB 15,5 0,0 2,0 System 1
Automatic DALI control of PIR presence detection in centre responding to entry and occupancy
Lighting system dependency factors calculation and data;
Calculation of FC
FC = 1,0 as the luminaires will not be dimmable
Calculation of FD
FD 1,0 as there will be no windows or rooflight in these rooms
Calculation of FO
The DALI system, activated by PIR presence detection provides power switch on and off.
From Table E.1 of the standard for automatic on/off switch FOC = 0,90
From Table E.2 of the standard for Restroom/toilet FA = 0,5
Now FO using Formulae E.1 of the standard is FO = FOC + 0,2 – FA = 0,6

Therefore FO = 0,6
System design data;

1, Power for illumination PN = 15,5 × 6 = 93W
2, Power for battery charge Pem = 2 × 2 = 4W
3, Power for controls standby Ppc = 0,0W

Toilet 1 0,6 1,0 1,0 93 4 0 2271 75 8730 8760
137
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annual energy required for illumination in the toilets using Formula 10 of the standard for systems WL
= {(PN1 × FC1) × FO [(tD × FD) + tN]}/1000 = {(93 × 1,0) × 0,6 × (2271 + 75}/1000 = 130,91
WL = 130,91 kWh/y
Annual energy required for standby lighting services in the toilet using Formula 11 of the standard WP
= {(Ppc × ty) + (Pem × te)}/1000 = {(0,0 × 8760) + (4 × 8730)}/1000 = 34,92
WP = 34,92 kWh/y
Annual energy W required for each toilet lighting system is calculated by using Formula 9 of the
standard
W = WL + WP = 130,91 + 34,92 = 165,83 kWh/y
The annual energy required for the toilets = 2 × 165,83 = 331,66 kWh/y
Calculation of LENI
The LENI for each toilet is given by Formula 13 of the standard where LENI = W/A and A is the floor
area of the toilet area is 16 m2
J.1.1.4 Office details
Open plan administration and operation management office for 24 staff
Size; L=18m, W=8m, H=3m, wp=0,75m
Windows along the east facing façade
Office electric lighting system;
138
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table J.6 — Luminaires in the office lighting scheme

Place Luminaire Quantity Description of luminaire and Lighting
Unique ID control type and operation system
technique operation
codea
Open plan office OLA 22 2x28W suspended fluorescent lamp System 1
luminaire with DALI control,
Dimmable, Daylight and Occupancy
PIR linked
Open plan office OLB 2 2x28W fluorescent lamp suspended System 1
self-contained maintained emergency
luminaire, DALI control, Dimmable,
Daylight and Occupancy PIR linked,
Open plan office OLC 2 1x18W fluorescent lamp self-contained System 2
maintained emergency exit sign, DALI
control
Outside OLD 2 5,6W LED light source self-contained System 3
doors bulkhead
Table J.7 — Power data of luminaires in the office

Luminaire Luminaire Luminaire Luminaire standby Lighting
Unique ID circuit power controls standby emergency battery system
(Pi) power (Pci) charge power (Pei) operation
code
[W] [W] [W]
OLA 60,5 0,2 0,0 System 1
OLB 60,5 0,2 7,0 System 1
OLC 15,0 0,2 3,0 System 2
OLD - 0 2,0 System 3
photocells set to regulate at the design illuminance of 500lx and PIR presence detection in centre area
of the room to respond to occupancy.
Calculation of FC
509 lx. This is 2 % overdesign that can be reduced by dimming to the design illuminance set value. The
power saving benefit for the general lighting (system 1) will be FCOD1 = 500/509 = 0,98 of the installed
power.
Maintenance factor compensation saving – due to MF of 0,8 will be FCMF1 = 1- (1- 0,8)/2 = 0,90
Therefore FC = FCOD1 × FCMF1 = 0,98 × 0,90 = 0,89
139
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
FC = 0,89
FC = 1,0 as system 2 is emergency lighting sign non dimmable and system 3 is non-maintained
Calculation of FD
The office has unobstructed east facing windows along the length of the wall. There is no solar shading
device.
The window size is 18m × 2m and contains 9 off 200mm wide vertical glass supporting mullions.
Table J.8 — Boundary conditions for the office
Parameter Variation
Width 18,0 m
Depth 8,0 m
Height 3,0 m
Space geometry
Orientation East
Obstruction (No obstructions), 0°
Light transmission τD65 glazing 0,74
Façade
Framing ratio k1 1 – (9offx2x0,2)/(18x2) = 0,90
System No solar shading device
Specific installed power 1 452/144 = 10,08 W/m2

Lighting Continuous dimming with PIR
System Control strategy
switching
Control points in the centre area
Control point, position
of the room
Working hours
The following steps will lead to the estimation of FDs

Step 1;
Determine the ratio Hdir/Hglob for the office location
Therefore from Table F.2 for near London with latitude γ˚ of 51,2˚,find Hdir/Hglob = 0,39
140
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Step 2;
Therefore from Table F.19 for latitude angle of 52,5˚,find tday = 2271h and tnight =75h
Step 3;
Determine the relative times trel,D,SNA for the non-activated protection systems as a function of the
façade orientation, the latitude γ˚ and the ratio of Hdir/Hglob from Table F.3 of the standard.
From Table F.3 for Hdir/Hglob = 0,39 and у˚ = 51,2˚ in Table East/West find trel,D,SNA = 0,82
Therefore solar shielding will be required for 2271 × (1-0,82) = 409h but no such facility in this
project.
Step 4;
Determine the daylight factor D for the office in the middle of the room, where the detectors are
located for the control of the required electric lighting, by first calculating DCA the daylight factor
produced by the raw building carcass and second calculating τeff,SNA is the effective transmittance value
for periods during which the protection system is not activated and finally multiplying these two
values to obtain D.
DCA is calculated by Formula F.14 from the standard where DCA = (4,13 + 20,0 ITr – 1,36IRD)ISh
Now ITr is calculated by Formula F.4 from the standard where ITr = ACA/AD, ACA is the carcass
opening 18m × 2m = 36m and AD is calculated by Formula F.2 from the standard where AD = aD ×
bD in which aD is 2,5(hLi – hTa) being 2,5(2,5 – 0,75) = 4,375m and bD is 18m making AD = 4,375 × 18
= 78,75m2
Therefore ITr = 36/78,75 = 0,46
Now IRD is calculated by Formula F.5 from the standard where IRD = aD/(hLi – hTa) = 4,375/(2,5 – 0,75)
Therefore IRD = 2,5
Now ISh is the shading index as in this project there are no shadings the index value is 1
Therefore DCA is (4,13 + 20,0 × 0,46 – 1,36 × 2,5 = 4,13 + 9,2 – 3,4 = 9,93 %
τeff,SNA is given by Formula F16 from the standard where τeff,SNA = k1 × k2 × k3 × τD65,SNA where k1 is 0,9, k2
is 0,9, k3 is 0,85 from F.3.2.4 of the standard and τD65,SNA the luminous transmittance value of the glass
used in the windows 0,74 obtained from Table F.4a of this Technical Report.
Therefore τeff,SNA = 0,9 × 0,9 × 0,85 × 0,74 = 0,51
Therefore D = 9,93 × 0,51 = 5,06 %
Step 5;
Determine the daylight supply factor FD,s,SNA from Table F.5 (East/West façade) of the standard for the
geographic location 52,5°, the value of Hdir/Hglob 0,39 obtained in step 2, value of D 5,06 % obtained in
step 4 and the maintained illuminance value of 500 lx by interpolation for the specific values if
required.
Therefore the daylight supply factor FD,s,SNA is 74,6
Step 6;
141
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
FD = 1 – (FD,s,SNA × FD,C). Now FD,C is obtained from Table F.16 of the standard for control type –
automated, dimmed with standby losses and no switch on type VII system, for maintained illuminance
of 500 lx and medium class daylight availability (obtained from Table F.1 of the standard for D 5,06 %)
being 0,8.
Therefore FD = 1 – (0,746 × 0,8) = 1 – 0,6 = 0,4
FD = 0,4
Calculation of FO
The lighting control system in the office consists of automatic dimming to photocell response and
activated by PIR presence detection power switch on and off.
From Table E.1 of the standard automatic presence detection and dimming FOC = 0,90
From Table E.2 of the standard for open plan office FA = 0,2
Now FO using Formula 5 from the standard is FO = FOC + 0,2 – FA = 0,90 + 0,2 – 0,2 = 0,90
FO = 0,90
System design data;

1, Power for illumination PN1 = 60,5 × 24 = 1452W
3, Power for controls standby Ppc = (22 × 0,2) + (2 × 0,2) + (2 × 0,2) = 5,2W

Office 1 0,90 0,4 0,89 1452 14 4,8 2271 75 8730 8760
Office 2 0,90 1,0 1,0 30 6 0,4 2271 75 8730 8760
Office 3 1,0 1,0 1,0 0,0 4 0,0 - - 8730 8760
Annual energy required for illumination in the office using Formula 10 of the standard for systems
WL = {(PN1 × FC1) × FO [(tD × FD) + tN]}/1000 + {(PN2 × FC2) × FO [(tD × FD2) + tN]}/1000 = {1452 × 0,89 ×
0,90 × [(2271 × 0,4) + 75]}/1000 + {(30 × 1,0) × 0,90 [(2271 × 1,0) + 75]}/1000 = 1207,1
WL = 1207,1 kWh/y
Annual energy required for standby lighting services in the office using Formula 11 of the standard
WP = {(Ppc × ty) + (Pem × te)}/1000 = {(5,2 × 8760) + (24 × 8730)}/1000 = 255,07
WP = 255,07 kWh/y
142
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annual energy W required for the office lighting system is calculated by using Formula 9 of the
standard
W = WL + WP = 1207,1 + 255,07 = 1462,17 kWh/y
Calculation of LENI
The LENI for the office is given by Formula 13 of the standard where LENI = W/A and A is the floor
area of the office 144 m2
J.1.1.5 Factory details
Open plan area of electronic equipment assembly, quality control and parts store
Size; L=28m, W=26m, H=5m, wp=0,75m
Shed rooflight with 15˚ slope of 4 off 26m x2m diffuse polycarbonate panels. Each supported by 8
off 300 wide metal tray runners
Factory electric lighting system;

Table J.9 — Luminaires in the factory lighting scheme
Place Luminaire Quantity Description of luminaire and control Lighting
Unique ID type and operation technique system
operation
codea
Factory FLA 86 47W LED trunking mounted batten with System 1
general diffuser luminaire on DALI control,
lighting Dimmable Daylight detection link
Factory FLB 4 47W LED trunking mounted self- System 1
general contained maintained emergency batten
lighting luminaire on DALI control, Dimmable,
Daylight linked,
Factory FLC 5 1x18W fluorescent lamp self-contained System 2
emergency exit maintained emergency exit sign, DALI
signs control
Outside FLD 5 5,6W LED light source self-contained System 3
doors bulkhead
143
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table J.10 — Power data of luminaires in the factory

Unique ID power (Pi) standby power (Pci) emergency battery system
charge power (Pei) operation
code
[W] [W] [W]
Type A 47 0,2 0,0 System 1
Type B 47 0,2 3,0 System 1
Type C 15,0 0,2 3,0 System 2
Type D - 0 2,0 System 3
photocells set to regulate at the design illuminance of 500lx and DALI managed On/Off control.
Calculation of FC
542 lx. The 8 % overdesign can be reduced by dimming to the set design illuminance value of 500 lx.
The power saving benefit for the general lighting (system 1) will be FCOD1 = 500/542 = 0,92 of the
installed power.
Maintenance factor compensation saving – due to MF of 0,8 will be FCMF2 = 1- (1- 0,8)/2 = 0,90
Therefore FC = FCOD1× FCMF1 = 0,92 × 0,90 = 0,83
FC = 0,83
FC = 1,0 as system 2 is non dimmable sign and system 3 is non-maintained
Calculation of FD
The factory has unobstructed shed shaped rooflights with no solar shading device.
The 4 rooflights run across at 2m width consist of 25 mm thick diffused polycarbonate quadruple skin.
The glazed area is 26m × 2m and contains 8 off 30mm wide metal supporting trays.
144
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table J.11 — Boundary conditions for the factory
Parameter Variation
Length 28,0 m
Width 26,0 m
Height 5,0 m
Space geometry
Orientation -
Obstruction No obstructions
Light transmission τD65 glazing 0,45
Rooflight
Framing ratio k1 1 – (8off x2x0,3)/(26x2) = 0,91
System No glare or solar shielding
Installed power density for
illumination area 728 m2 4320/728 = 5,93 W/m2

Lighting
System Continuous dimming with
Control strategy
manual switching
Control points in the centre area
Control point, position
of the room
Working hours
The following steps will lead to the estimation of FDs

Step 1;
Determine the ratio Hdir/Hglob for the factory location
Therefore from Table F.2 for near London with latitude γ˚ of 51,2˚,find Hdir/Hglob
Hdir/Hglob = 0,39
Step 2;
Therefore from Table F.19 for latitude angle of 52,5˚,find tday and tnight
tday = 2271h and tnight =75h
Step 3;
145
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Determine the relative times trel,D,SNA for the non-activated protection systems as a function of
orientation, the surface slope, latitude location or γ˚ from Table F.13 of the standard.
From Table F.13 for horizontal, 0˚ slope in London area find trel,D,SNA = 0,69
This shows that solar shielding would be required for 2271 x(1- 0,69) = 704h but no such facility in
this project.
Step 4;
Determine the mean daylight factor D in the factory for the detectors to control the required electric
lighting using Formula F.16 of the standard where
DSNA = Da × τD65,SNA × kObl,1 × kObl,2 × kObl3 × ∑ ACa × ᶯR/AD %
Da = 100 %, τD65,SNA = 0,45 from Table.16a, kObl,1 = 0,91, kObl,2 = 0,90, kObl,3 = 0,85 (see page 71 of
standard), ∑ ACa = 26 × 2 × 4 = 208 m2, AD = 728 m2, ᶯR = 0,9 is found from Table F.10 of the standard
for hG/hW = 1,for horizontal slope(30˚, 30˚) and room index k = (28 × 26)/(28 + 26) × 4,25 = 3,2
Therefore DSNA = 1,0 × 0,45 × 0,91 × 0,9 × 0,85 × 0,29 × 0,9 = 8 % and from Table F.11 of the standard
this classified as strong daylight availability
Step 5;
Determine the daylight supply factor FD,SNA from Table F.10 of the Technical Report for London area for
horizontal orientation, surface slope 0˚, Maintained illuminance value of 500 lx and strong
classification find the specific value.
Therefore the daylight supply factor FD,SNA is 0,87
Step 6;
FD = 1 – (FD,SNA × FD,C). Now FD,C is obtained from Table F.16 of the standard for control type –
automated, dimmed with standby losses, switch on type V system, for maintained illuminance of 500 lx
and strong class daylight availability find value of 0,75
Therefore FD = 1 – (0,87 × 0,75) = 1 – 0,65 = 0,35
FD = 0,35
Calculation of FO
There is no automatic presence detection control for the factory lighting.
FO = 1,0
System design data;
3, Power for controls standby Ppc = (90 × 0,2) + (5 × 0,2) = 19W
146
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)

Factory 1 1,0 0,35 0,83 4230 12 18 2271 75 8730 8760
Factory 2 1,0 1,0 1,0 75 15 1,0 2271 75 8730 8760
Factory 3 1,0 1,0 1,0 0,0 10,0 0,0 - - 8730 8760
Annual energy required for illumination in the factory using Formula 10 of the standard for systems
WL = {(PN1 × FC1) × FO [(tD × FD) + tN]}/1000 + {(PN2 × FC2) × FO [(tD × FD2) + tN]}/1000 = {4230 × 0,83 ×
1,0 × [(2271 × 0,35) + 75]}/1000 + {(75 × 1,0) × 1,0 [(2271 × 1,0) + 75]}/1000 = 3229,91
WL = 3229,91 kWh/y
Annual energy required for standby lighting services in the factory using Formula 11 of the standard
WP = {(Ppc × ty) + (Pem × te)}/1000 = {(19 × 8760) + (37 × 8730)}/1000 = 489,45
WP = 489,45 kWh/y
Annual energy W required for the factory lighting system is calculated by using Formula 9 of the
standard
W = WL + WP = 3229,91 + 489,45 = 3719,36 kWh/y
The LENI for the factory is given by Formula 13 of the standard where LENI = W/A and A is the floor
area of the office 728 m2
Calculation of LENI
J.1.1.6 Manufacturing building energy requirement
The annual energy W required for the building is calculated by summing up the energy required for
the lighting system in each specified areas of the building.
Energy required for lighting of:
Office = 1462,17 kWh/y
Factory = 3719,36 kWh/y
Entrance = 301,49 kWh/y
Toilets = 331,66 kWh/y
Building = 5814,68 kWh/y
The LENI for the building is

LENI = W/A and A is the floor area of the building = 36 × 26 = 936 m2
147
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
J.1.2 Example 2 – New design residential bungalow
living areas plus bathroom, shown in Figure J.2.
Figure J.2 — Plan of the residential building
Occupancy hours from EN 15193-1:2017, Table B.2

Day 1 820 hours / year
Night 1 680 hours / year
Total 3 500 hours / year
Assume no automatic controls, manual switching only and no emergency lighting installed.
The calculations are made by using Formula 32 of the standard and by taking into account that in this
example FC = 1,0, FD = 1,0, WPc = 0, WPe = 0 the Formula 32 of the standard can be simplified to
LENIsub = FC × (Pj/1 000) × FO [(tD × FD) + tN] = (Pj/1 000) × FO × ttot
Where FO × ttot is the time period when the zone(room) is occupied and the value can be obtained by
Occupancy hours = Total hours – (absence factor ×total hours)
J.1.2.2 Living room
Area 11,4 m²
Classification according to EN 15193-1:2017, Table B.11 Small
148
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Installed power according to EN 15193-1:2017, Table B.10 100 W

Installed power density 8,77 W/m²
Absence factor from EN 15193-1:2017, Table E.2 0,3
Occupancy hours 3 500 - (0,3 × 3 500) =
2 450 hours/year
LENIsub = (8,77 / 1 000) × 2 450 = 21,49 kWh / m² year
J.1.2.3 Dining room
Area 13,2 m²
Classification according to EN 15193-1:2017, Table B.11 Medium
Occupancy hours 3 500-(0,7 × 3500) =
1 050 hours/year
LENIsub = (10,23 / 1 000) × 1 050 = 10,74 kWh/m² year
J.1.2.4 Kitchen
Area 9,9 m²
General lighting 80 W
Worktop lighting 90 W
Total 170 W
Occupancy hours 3 500 - (0,6 × 3 500) =
1 400 hours/year
J.1.2.5 Bathroom
Area 7,5 m²
Occupancy hours 3 500 - (0,8 × 3 500) =
700 hours/year
LENIsub = (9,33 / 1000) x 700 = 6,53 kWh / m² year
149
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
J.1.2.6 Bedroom1
Area 9,6 m²
Occupancy hours 3 500 - (0,4 × 3 500) =
2 100 hours/year
J.1.2.7 Bedroom2
Area 10,4 m²
Occupancy hours 3 500 - (0,4 × 3 500) =
2100 hours/year
LENIsub = (10,58 / 1000) × 2100 = 22,22 kWh / m² year
J.1.2.8 Hall
Area 8,28 m²
Classification according to EN 15193-1:2017, Table B.11 Large
Installed power according to EN 15193-1:2017, Table B.10 80W
Occupancy hours 3 500-(0,7 × 3 500) =
1 050 hours/year
J.1.2.9 Building energy requirement
( 21, 49 ×11, 4 ) + (10, 74 1

LENI =
× 3, 2 ) + ( 24, 04 9,9
× ) + ( 6,53 7,5
× ) + ( 24, 07 9, × 4 ) + (10,14 8,
× 6 ) + ( 22, 22 10, × 28 )
11, 4 1+ 3, 2
+ 9,9
+ 7,5
+ 9, 6 1
+ 0, 4
+ 8, 28
244,99 + 1 41, 77 238,

+ 00 48,98 231,
+ + 07 231,
+ 09 83,96
+
LENI =
70, 28
LENI =1 7,36 kWh / m² year
The annual building energy requirement = 17,36 × 70,28 = 1 220 kWh
150
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
J.2 Method 2
J.2.1 Example 1 – New design manufacturing building
Manufacturing building with office, production and storage areas as shown in layout plan Figure J.1
located in middle England latitude 52,5°, Operating 5 days per week from 08:00 to 17:00.
J.2.1.2 Entrance details
Fully glazed east facing entrance having open area for use by staff and visitor with telephone call
point
Size; L=8m, W=4m, H=3m, wp=0,0m
Surface reflectances; Ceiling 70 %, Walls 50 %, Floor 20 %
Entrance electric lighting system
The lighting will be LED recessed downlight for general illumination and with emergency lighting to
comply EN 1838 requirements
Calculation of Pn
Installed power requirement calculated by using Formulae C.1 and C.2 of the standard. Where Pn = Pj ×
A W and Pj = Pj.lx × Etask × FMF × FCA × FL W/m2
Lamp type to be 36W LED recessed downlights having UFF 0 %.
Calculate room index k =8 × 4/(8 + 4)3 = 0,89
From Table C.1 for k = 0,89 and UFF = 0 % PJ.lx = 0,031 W/m2/lx
Etask = 300
FMF = 0,8/0,8 = 1,0 by using Formula C.4 of the standard
FCA = 1,0 as the whole area is taken to be task area
FL = 0,86 obtained from Table B.9 of the standard for LED light source
Therefore PJ = 0,031 × 300 × 1 × 1 × 0,86 = 8 W/m2
Therefore PN = 8 × 32 = 256 W
Calculation of WPC and WPe
The energy density Wpc for controls from Table B.1 of the standard is 1,5 kWh/m2 year
The energy density Wpe for battery charging of emergency lighting from Table B.1 of the standard is
1,0 kWh/m2 year
151
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Calculation of FO
From Table B.2 of the standard for manufacturing building the annual operating hours tD = 2 500 h and
tN = 1500 h
From Table B.6 of the standard for entrance hall FA = 0,0
FO = 1
Calculation of FD
To find FD we need to use Formula 30 of the standard but also need to find values for D and FD,S,SNA and
FD,S
To find D we need Formula 25 from the standard where D = 0,34(4,13 + 20,0 ITr,j – 1,36IRD,j)
ITr is calculated by Formula 26 from the standard where ITr,j = ACA/AD, ACA is the carcass opening
4m × 3m = 12m and AD is calculated by Formula F.2 from the standard and where AD = aD × bD in
which aD is 2,5(hLi – hTa) being 2,5(3,0 – 0,0) = 7,5m and bD is 4m making AD = 7,5 × 4 = 30m2
Therefore ITr,j = 12/30 = 0,40
IRD is calculated by Formula F.5 from the standard where IRD,j = aD/(hLi – hTa) = 7,5/(3,0 – 0,0)
Therefore IRD,j = 2,5
ISh is the shading index as in this project there are no shadings the index value is 1
Therefore D is 0,34(4,13 + 20,0 × 0,4 – 1,36 × 2,5) = 0,34(12,13 – 3,4) = 2,97 %
From Table B.3 of the standard by interpolation for D=2,97 find FD,S,SNA =75 %
From Formula 29 of the standard FD,S = (0,65 × 0,75) + 0,25 = 0,74
From Formula 30 of the standard FD = 1 – 0,52 × 0,74 = 0,62
FD = 0,62
Calculation of FC
From Table B.8 of the standard for LED dimmable circuit FC = 0,85
FC = 0,85
Calculation of LENI
Using Formula 32 of the standard – LENI = {0,85 × (8/1000) × 1,0[(2500 × 0,62) + 1500]} + 1,0 + 1,5 =
23,24 kWh/m2/year
LENI = 23,24 kWh/m2 year
Calculation of Total annual energy requirement W
The annual energy requirement is 23,24 × 32 = 743,68 kWh/year
152
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
J.2.1.3 Toilet details
Two windowless male and female equal sized toilets (restroom) located by the entrance, there will
be small windows in the doors to the toilets.
Size; L=4m, W=4m, H=3m, wp=0,0m
Surface reflectances; Ceiling 70 %, Walls 50 %, Floor 20 %
Toilet areas electric lighting system;
The lighting will be surface mounted LED decorative luminaires for general illumination remotely
controlled for on/off DALI with PIR for entry and occupancy and with emergency lighting to comply
EN 1838 requirements
Calculation of Pn
Installed power requirement calculated by using Formulae C.1 and C.2 of the standard.
Where Pn = Pj × A W and Pj = Pj.lx × Etask × FMF × FCA × FL W/m2
Lamp type to be LED and luminaire surface mounted luminaire having UFF 0 %.
Calculate room index k =4 × 4/(4 + 4)3 = 0,67
Etask = 200
Therefore PJ = 0,035 × 200 × 1 × 1 × 0,86 = 6,02 W/m2
Therefore PN = 6,02 × 16 = 96,32 W
The energy density Wpc = 0 as the control is on the power supply line.
1,0 kWh/m2 year
Calculation of FO
From Table B.2 of the standard for manufacturing building the annual operating hours tD = 2500 h and
tN = 1500 h
From Table B.6 of the standard for rest room/toilet FA = 0,5
153
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
From Table B.7 of the standard for auto on/off FO = 0,6

FO = 0,6
Calculation of FD
FD = 1,0 as there will be no daylight available
Calculation of FC
FC = 1,0 as there will be no dimming
Calculation of LENI
Using Formula 32 of the standard

LENI = {1,0 × (6,02/1000) × 0,6[(2500 × 1,0) + 1500]} + 1,0 = 15,45 kWh / m² year
LENI = 15,45 kWh/m2year
Calculation of Total energy requirement
The annual energy requirement for each toilet = 15,45 × 16 = 247,2 kWh/year
The total energy required for the toilets is 2 × 247,2 = 494,4 kWh / year
J.2.1.4 Office details
Open plan administration and operation management office for 24 staff

Size; L=18m, W=8m, H=3m, wp=0,75m
Windows along the length of east facing façade
Lighting; General illumination Maintained illuminance of 500lx to include automatic controls of

full dimming and presence detection. Also to provide emergency lighting to EN 1838
Office electric lighting system;
Calculation of Pn
Installed power requirement calculated by using Formulae C.1 and C.2 of the standard. Where – Pn = Pj
× A W and Pj = Pj.lx × Etask × FMF × FCA × FL W/m2
Lamp type to be 2x28W T16 each 2600lm output fitted into suspended direct indirect type low
brightness luminaire approximates UFF 30 %.
Calculate room index k =18 × 8/(18 + 8)2,25 = 2,46
Etask = 500
154
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
FL = 0,9 obtained from Table B.9 of the standard for T16 fluorescent lamp
Therefore PJ = 0,028 × 500 × 1 × 1 × 0,9 = 12,6 W/m2
PN = 12,6 × 144 = 1814,4 W
Calculation of Wpc and WPe
The energy density Wpc for controls from Table B.1 of the standard is 1,5 kWh/m2 year
1,0 kWh/m2 year
Calculation of FO
From Table B.2 of the standard the annual operating hours tD = 2250 h and tN = 250 h
From Table B.6 of the standard for open plan office with fine sensing FA = 0,2 and
from B.7 of the standard dimmed auto on/off FO = 0,9
FO = 0,9
Calculation of FD
Assuming good supply of daylight from the extensive east facing window can assume D = 5 %
From Table B.3 of the standard FD,S,SNA = 81 % and from Formula 29 of the standard FD,S = 0,65 × 0,81 +
0,25=0,78
Therefore FD = 1 – 0,52 × 0,78 = 0,59
FD = 0,59
Calculation of FC
From Table B.8 of the standard for linear fluorescent dimmable circuit FC = 0,9
FC = 0,9
Calculation of LENI
Therefore using Formula 32 of the standard LENI = {0,9 × (12,15/1000) × 0,9[(2250 × 0,59) + 250]} +
1,0 + 1,5 = 18,02 kWh/m2/year
LENI = 18,02 kWh/m2/year
Calculation of Annual energy requirement
The annual energy requirement is 18,02 × 144 = 2594,88 kWh
J.2.1.5 Factory details
Open plan area consist of electronic equipment assembly, quality control and parts store
Size; L=28m, W=26m, H=5m, wp=0,75m
Shed roof with 15˚ slope and having 30 % of floor area of diffuse polycarbonate rooflights
155
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)

Factory electric lighting system;
Installed power requirement calculated by using Formulae C.1 and C.2 of the standard.
Calculation of Pn
Where Pn = Pj × A W and Pj = Pj.lx × Etask × FMF × FCA × FL W/m2
Lamp type to be ceiling mounted 47W LED batten with diffuser each 6000lm output fitted into
ceiling mounted trunking approximates UFF 0 %.
Calculate room index k =28 × 26/(28 + 26)4.25 = 3,2
Etask = 500
Therefore PJ = 0,022 × 500 × 1 × 1 × 0,86 = 9,46 W/m2
PN = 9,46 × 728 = 6887 W
The energy density Wpc for controls from Table B.1 is of the standard 1,5 kWh/m2 year
1,0 kWh/m2 year
Calculation of Fo
From Table B.2 of the standard the annual operating hours tD = 2500 h and tN = 1500 h
From Table B.6 of the standard for assembly hall FA = 0,0
Fo = 1
Calculation of FD
Light transmission from Table F.16a in the Technical Report τD65 glazing = 0,45
ACA/AD = 0,3 (30 % glazing) ɳR = 0,92 is found
From Table B.4 of the standard for room index 3,2
From Formula 31 of the standard DSNA =0,54 × 0,45 × 0,3 × 0,92 = 0,067 which is classified as
medium daylight availability according to Table F.11 of the standard
From Table B.5 of the standard FD,S = 0,85
Therefore from Formula 30 of the standard FD = 1 – 0,52 × 0,85 = 0,56
156
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
FD = 0,56
Calculation of FC
From Table B.8 of the standard for LED dimmable circuit FC = 0,85
FC = 0,85
Calculation of LENI
Using Formula 32 of the standard LENI = {0,85 × (9,46/1000) × 1,0[(2500 × 0,56) + 1500]} + 1,0 + 1,5
= 25,83 kWh/m2/year
LENI = 25,83 kWh/m2/year
Calculation of Annual energy requirements
The annual energy requirement is 25,83 × 728 = 18804,24 kWh/year

J.2.1.6 Manufacturing building energy requirement
The annual energy W required for the building is calculated by summing up the energy required for
the lighting system in each specified areas of the building.
Energy required for lighting of:
Office = 2594 kWh/y
Factory = 18804 kWh/y
Entrance = 744 kWh/y
Toilets = 494 kWh/y
Building energy requirement = 22636 kWh/year
Calculation of LENI
The LENI for the building is calculated by LENI = W/A and A is the floor area of the building = 36 ×
26 = 936 m2
LENI = 22636/936 = 24,2 kWh/m2 per year
J.2.2 Example 2 – New design residential bungalow
living areas plus bathroom, shown in Figure J.2.
Occupancy hours from Table B.2 Day 1820 hours / year
Night 1680 hours / year
Total 3500 hours / year
Assume no automatic controls, manual switching only.
Assume no emergency lighting installed.
157
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
J.2.2.2 Living room
Area 11,4 m²
Classification according to Table B.11 Small
Installed power according to Table B.10 100W
J.2.2.3 Dining room
Area 13,2 m²
Classification according to Table B.11 Medium
J.2.2.4 Kitchen
Area 9,9 m²
Installed power according to Table B.10
General lighting 80W
Worktop lighting 90W
Total 170W
J.2.2.5 Bathroom
Area 7,5 m²
J.2.2.6 Bedroom1
Area 9,6 m²
J.2.2.7 Bedroom2
Area 10,4 m²
J.2.2.8 Hall
Area 8,28 m²
Classification according to Table B.11 Large
J.2.2.9 Building energy requirement
Total installed power 100+135+170+70+110+110+80 = 775W

Total area 70 m²
158
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Total power density 11,07 W/m²

Occupancy hours from Table B.2 3500 hours / year
LENI = (11,07/1000) × 3500 = 38,75 kWh /m²/year
Annual energy requirement = 38,75 × 70 = 2712,5 kWh/year
J.3 Method 3
J.3.1 Example 1 – Existing manufacturing building
Existing single storey product manufacturing building with facilities for administration offices,
storage area. See Figure J.1 for a plan of the building. Total floor area 936 m².
J.3.1.2 Annual meter readings
Meter 1 registered the energy supplied to the front of the building having the lower ceiling height of
3m (e.g. entrance, office and toilet areas). Meter 2 registered the energy supplied to the factory area
having the higher ceiling height of 5m.
Meter 1 2067 kWh / year
Meter 2 3388 kWh / year
Annual energy used by the building = 5455 kWh / year
J.3.1.3 Building LENI
LENI = 5455 / 936 = 5,83 kWh / m² year.
159
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annex K
(informative)
Lighting controls
K.1 Introduction
Annex K describes the role and types of lighting controls in use.
The lighting controls maybe manually or automatically operated. Lighting control systems are an
essential part of lighting installations. Their main purpose is to control the light output of the electric
lighting system in order to reduce the electrical energy consumption of the lighting system but without
the loss of the required light for visual task, visual comfort and the environment. The lighting control
system not only needs to achieve good performance in energy savings, but should also be acceptable to
the end-users so that they do not disable or alter its functions. The end-users need to understand the
purpose and operation of the control system and should be trained in the correct usage. Some users
may also need additional training and be permitted to have access to change the operating conditions
of the control regime.
There are many types of lighting control systems in use and they vary in control capabilities, functions,
installation complexity, costs and energy savings. The control system has to be compatible with the
lighting solution in the installation particularly with the light source and its circuitry. It is essential that
all electric lighting systems have a secure isolating system to disconnect from the mains supply when
maintenance and servicing of the luminaires is carried out.
In general lighting control and management systems can be classified as manual or automatic
operation.
K.2 Manual controls

K.2.1 General
These basic types of controls are low cost and easy to install but not very robust with respect to
improving the energy efficiency of the lighting installation as they rely heavily on the occupants
actions. Occupants are not particularly concerned by energy saving especially in non-domestic
buildings and can be unreliable in activating the controls.
K.2.2 On/Off control
This is a manually operated on/off switch. A simple on/off switch can control the power supply to one
(pull switch) or several luminaires (room switch) in the lighting installation. In large multi occupancy
places or infrequently used places they tend to be inefficient due to the unreliable way users operate
the switches. In large rooms to improve effectiveness it is recommended to restrict the distance of the
furthest luminaire from the switch and limit the number of luminaires that are connected and
controlled by one switch. Large spaces should be zoned and the luminaires should be allocated to one
switch in each activity zone for operation by the users. To ensure regular user activation one switch
should only control luminaires within 6m of the switch.
Correctly positioned manually operated On/Off switch can yield about 20 % savings in single
occupancy space and about 10 % in multi occupancy space in comparison to a poorly positioned
switch.
160
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
K.2.3 On/Off Dimming control
This is a manually operated dimmer switch. Some on/off controllers include a dimmer to vary
manually the power supply to the connected dimmable luminaires. These controllers allow the user to
set the luminaire light output to provide the required illuminance for the task. Manual dimming
control is ideal for multi-functional rooms such as meeting rooms, teaching rooms, etc. particularly
where projection of images takes place. Additional energy savings can also be made when using a
localized lighting system with individual dimming in the work place.
Manually operated dimming control can yield about 25 % savings in comparison to non-dimmable
manual control system.
Individual dimming can also improve lighting comfort in work places when lighting can be adjusted to
individual needs and to a preferred luminance distribution.
K.3 Automatic controls

K.3.1 General
These automatically operated types of controls are more costly and more complex to install but can
provide flexibility in the lighting scheme function and can make substantial savings in the energy used
for electric lighting. There are many types on offer and each can be tailored to the requirements of
specific places. The controls can be pre-programmed to yield optimum savings without loss of lighting
effectiveness and acceptance by the occupants. To retain the efficiency the system should be serviced
at the recommended intervals.
K.3.2 Timed on/off control
This is a clock operated on/off switch. A time clock activated switch that operates the lights during
pre-planned occupancy period. It is more reliable method of on/off control and is best suited for
buildings having predictable occupancy as it requires strictly timed regime of occupancy periods but
permits virtually no flexibility to changes by the end-users. This type of control can also be used for
load shedding at times of peak use and high cost periods in large industrial buildings. They allow
reduction in the lighting energy usage in non-essential areas during the critical peak energy use
periods when the electrical energy rates are at their highest and make substantial cost saving. Timed
on/off control can make about 20 % energy savings in comparison to purely manual control systems.
K.3.3 Sensor activated control
This is a detector initiated and operated control system. The sensor activated automatic control is the
most reliable and effective lighting control system for saving energy used for lighting. In general there
are two types of sensors. Those respond to occupancy and to light level.
K.3.4 Occupancy sensor
This is a device for detecting human presence and movement. The detector senses the active presence
of humans within the sensitivity range of the detector and directly instructs the lighting controller to
activate the switch. In general detectors switch off the lighting automatically when there is nobody in
the area and some occupancy sensors are also used to switch lights on automatically when somebody
enters the sensing area and then hold on the lights whilst there is presence. Detection of occupancy
can be “passive infrared (PIR), microwave or ultrasonic” sensors. Occupancy sensors are not suitable
for use with high pressure discharge lamps as they require long run-up and even longer re-strike time
during which vital task activity can be compromised.
Occupancy sensing techniques can be described as Absence detection and Presence detection.
161
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
K.3.4.1 Absence detection
This is a process when the user manually switches on the lights and the lights are automatically
switched off when nobody is in the area. This technique is found to be the most effective energy saver.
Absence operated lighting control can yield about 35 % savings in comparison to purely manual
control systems.
K.3.4.2 Presence detection
This is a process when the lights are automatically switched on when somebody enters the detection
area and are automatically switched off when there is nobody in the sensing area. Presence operated
lighting control can yield about 30 % savings in comparison to purely manual control systems.
NOTE Absence detection will provide higher energy savings than presence detection but it does require
user participation in the control and is therefore a semi-automatic process.
K.3.5 Light level sensor
This is a photocell (PE) device that detects illuminance. The detector senses the light level in the
sensing area and instructs the control system to reduce the power supply (the process called
dimming) to the electric lights when the light level exceeds the required pre-set illuminance or
increase the power supply when the light level is low.
There are two generally accepted light level control conditions namely daylight harvesting and
constant illuminance. With each system the electric lights have to be dimmable luminaires.
K.3.5.1 Daylight harvesting
This is when the required lighting condition is totally or partly provided by daylight. In many interiors
adequate supply of daylight is available through windows or rooflights to meet the required lighting
conditions during most of the occupancy period and therefore electric lights are only used as
supplement when daylight fades. A photocell is used to measure the light level within the zones or
areas that have access to daylight. If the detected light level is too high the photocell will instruct the
lighting controller to automatically reduce the light output of the relevant group of electric lights in the
zone. If it is too low, the controller will increase the light output of the electric lights. The photocell
sensor ensures that the required light levels are maintained during the entire occupied period and will
yield substantial savings in energy for lighting. Daylight linked dimming control can yield about 60 %
savings in comparison to purely manual control systems.
K.3.5.2 Constant illuminance
This is when the quantity of electric light supply is adjusted automatically by dimming to maintain the
required task illuminance. As all lighting installations suffer depreciation from the instant they are
installed and to ensure that the required maintained illuminance is available at all required times this
decay has to be compensated. The lighting scheme maintenance factor is used to compensate for the
decay. During the scheme design the initial lighting solution is oversized to cover for the loss of light
during the maintenance cycle. For most schemes the maintenance factor is about 0,75 and therefore
the lighting solution is oversized by about 25 %. Also in some schemes the architectural integration
requires luminaires to be placed at regular intervals that can necessitate employing extra luminaires
and will result in high illuminance. By using a photocell detector to measure the illuminance within the
detection zone in the room the high initial illuminance will be reduced to the required illuminance. The
detector will instruct the lighting controller to automatically reduce the power supply and therefore
the light output of the dimmable luminaires to deliver the required maintained illuminance. Over a
period of time as the light output falls due to ageing of lamps or deposition of dirt on optical surfaces
the lighting controller will continuously increase the power supply and luminaire light output to
ensure constant illuminance. This constant illuminance is held until the power supply to lighting
system reaches the rated power (i.e. 100 % output) at which point the lighting system needs to be
162
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
serviced according to the maintenance schedule. Constant illuminance linked control can yield about
15 % savings in comparison to purely manual control systems.
K.3.5.3 Combined sensor
This is a device that contains both occupancy and light level detectors. The most energy efficient
version is a combination of absence detection and light level sensing based system. In many places the
combined daylight, constant illuminance and presence linked controls in a dimming circuit can yield
about 75 % savings in comparison to purely manual control systems.
K.4 Lighting control systems

K.4.1 General
Functionally lighting controls can turn lights on/off, vary the light output from zero to 100 % when the
light source is dimmable, set scenes manually or dynamically and can change the hue and intensity of
coloured light sources manually or dynamically.
Of these on/off and dimming controls are primarily used for energy saving whilst scene setting and
colour mixing is used for other lighting functions, entertainment, human wellness and comfort. In this
standard the focus is on the lighting control techniques employed for energy saving.
The automatic lighting controls may consist of standalone system (self-contained intelligent
luminaire), linked or networked dedicated lighting control system and integrated building control
system.
K.4.2 Standalone (self-contained) lighting control system
This is when the luminaire has built in detectors and control system that after commissioning carry
out all control instructions automatically in isolation from other luminaires or systems. They are self-
managed.
K.4.3 Linked lighting control system
This is an arrangement where the luminaires in the system receive instruction from one or more
sensors/detectors distributed through a communication network. The instructions maybe
communicated by wireless, via the mains cable or separate signal carrying wiring. Each technique
employs some form of coded protocol. Such protocol can be propriety or standardized such as the
DALI network protocol defined by IEC 62386.
K.4.4 Integrated building control system
This is where the lighting control system is integrated or shares information (sensor output) with
other building services control systems and forms an integrated building automation system. Such
system in addition to luminaire controls maybe linked to “smart glazing” and “window blinds and
louvers”. Smart glazing is a type of glazing that when an appropriate signal is applied can
automatically initiate changes to the transmittance of the glazing to allow more or less light to enter
into the building. Automatically controlled window blinds and louvers linked to light level sensors can
help to control the quality of the daylight entry and at night close the blinds and louvers to avoid loss
of electric light through the glazing.
K.4.5 Algorithmic lighting
The lighting profession has recognized the importance of designing lighting installations to take non
visual biological effects into account and this is related to the regulation of certain hormones in the
human body. It is to be expected that in the near future a new CEN standard or the standard
163
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
EN 12464-1 will incorporate criteria covering the aspects of the non-visual biological effects of
artificial lighting.
To optimize the biological effects through lighting, higher lighting levels than required for pure visual
effects are necessary for part of the day (especially in the morning and early afternoon). These higher
lighting levels can be limited considerably if cool white light is used (colour temperature up to some
6000K). At moments when less biological effective lighting is required the lighting can be of warmer
colour and reduced gradually to the minimum level required for pure vision only. The automatic
changing of lighting level, direction and colour temperature in the course of the day is called
“algorithmic lighting”. To change the colour temperature, these installations use different coloured
light sources or light sources with different colour temperature in one luminaire. The light sources are
also dimmed in proportions to obtain different light levels and colour temperatures.
Typically, for an algorithmic lighting installation, the total installed lighting load will be greater than
that of a non-algorithmic lighting system. However, this lighting is not usually used at maximum
demand for long periods. The actual power used is likely to be in the range of 30 % to 70 % of the
installed load dependant on the scheme.
K.4.6 Lighting installations with Scene Setting
Sometimes the activities in a room vary in the course of the day and the lighting needs to be adapted to
the different activities. This may for example be the case in conference and meeting rooms where the
activities may vary from presenting slides on a screen, discussions between participants to reading
and writing and working with individual PCs. In an office the activities may for example vary from
reading and writing, working with PC’s, using CAD workstations and discussions with colleagues or
visitors. If for each of these different activities, specific lighting can be switched on (often remotely
controlled), we speak of “scene setting”. Typically for scene setting, different settings are never used at
the same moment, thus the total installed power is never used. For calculating the actual power used
in the course of a day or year the average use of each different setting corresponding to each specific
activity has to be predicted.
 tsetting1   tsetting 2 
Wactual= ∑ × Wsetting1  +  × Wsetting 2 
 ts   ts  (K.1)
ts = tSetting 1 + tSetting 2 +… (h) (K.2)
where
ts is the total operating time of the scene setting [h]
tsetting is the envisaged setting is in use [h]
Wsetting is the total power of all luminaires forming part of the envisaged setting [W]
164
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annex L
(informative)
Spread sheet and flow diagram
The flow diagram Figure L.1 below illustrates the process involved in the operation of the Excel
spreadsheet. The spreadsheet will be an electronic page and when finalized this annex will provide a
live link to activate it. The spreadsheet will seek input information as detailed in the flow diagram.
Figure L.1 — Flow Diagram
165
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annex M
(informative)
Benchmark values
A set of LENI benchmark values are provided in Table M.1.

The values have been derived for the seven space types described in 6.7.3.5 and link up with the
expenditure data provided in Table 9 and Table 10 of this Technical Report.
166
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Table M.1 — Some examples of LENI benchmark values for spaces and lighting installations
Electric lighting Installed Power Annual operating Illumination control

Density (Pj) LENI
system hours Dependency factors
No. Space type
[W/m2] tD tN Type FO FD FC
Type
hours [-] [-] [-] [kWh/m²y]
I 7,74 Automatic 0,3 0,39 0,9 4,31
a Standard, direct
1 II Circulation area 2250 250 Manual 0,4 0,61 1 6,81
b I Existing, direct 29,47 2250 250 Manual 0,4 0,62 1 25,94
I 12,18 Automatic 0,7 0,34 0,9 6,00
a Efficient, direct
II 2250 250 Manual 0,8 0,49 1 10,97
I 14,28 Automatic 0,7 0,34 0,9 7,04
b Efficient, dir / ind
II Personal office 2250 250 Manual 0,8 0,49 1 12,86
2
c I (single occupant) Standard, direct 16,43 2250 250 Manual 0,8 0,49 1 14,80
d I Standard, dir / ind 17,85 2250 250 Manual 0,8 0,49 1 16,08
e I Existing, direct 34,95 2250 250 Manual 0,8 0,49 1 31,47
f I Existing, direct/indirect 43,40 2250 250 Manual 0,8 0,49 1 39,09
I 12,37 Automatic 0,6 0,37 0,9 9,91
3 a Conference Efficient, dir / ind
II 2250 250 Manual 0,7 0,58 1 15,30
I 10,73 Automatic 1 0,38 0,9 19,43
a Efficient, dir / ind
4 II Open floor office 2250 250 Manual 1 0,61 1 23,23
b I Existing, direct 26,84 2250 250 Manual 1 0,61 0,9 58,08
I Kitchen in non- 11,54 Automatic 1 0,38 1 18,66
5 a Efficient, direct
II residetial buildings 1250 1250 Manual 1 0,61 1 23,60
167
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Electric lighting Installed Power Annual operating Illumination control

Density (Pj) LENI
system hours Dependency factors
No. Space type
[W/m2] tD tN Type FO FD FC
Type
hours [-] [-] [-] [kWh/m²y]
b I Existing, direct 33,12 1250 1250 Manual 1 0,61 1 67,75
a I SON, direct 7,09 2500 1500 Manual 1 0,10 1 1,75
b I Manufacturing hall HMI, direct 13,29 2500 1500 Manual 1 0,10 1 3,29
6
c II with roof lights T16, direct 12,76 2500 1500 Automatic 1 0,07 0,85 2,01
d I Existing, direct 34,48 2500 1500 Manual 1 0,01 1 8,53

a I SON, direct 7,09 2500 1500 Manual 1 - 1 27,17
b I Manufacturing hall HMI, direct 13,29 2500 1500 Manual 1 - 1 50,94
7
c II without roof lights T16, direct 12,76 2500 1500 automatic 1 - 0,85 41,57
d I Existing, direct 34,48 2500 1500 manual 1 - 1 132,10
LENI = {FC × (Pj / 1000) × FO [(tD × FD) + tN]} + 1 + 1,5 [kWh / (m2 year)]
168
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annex N
(informative)
Domestic lighting guide
N.1 Introduction
Each room in a house requires the right type of lighting for the tasks that are performed in it and the
atmosphere its inhabitants wish to create in it.
The considerations of this document are oriented for normal observers. Specific considerations for
elderly and visually impaired observers are specific and are not considered in this document.
The lighting can be achieved using electric lighting or daylight.
Good daylight supply creates luminous ambiance balancing direct and diffuse light. Key parameters of
daylight supply and considerations about daylight are dealt in N.3.
N.2 Lighting design

N.2.1 General
Each room or space in a domestic building requires some form of light. The best approach to the
lighting design is to consider the function and what is the activity is taking place in the room that
requires illumination.
N.2.2 Kitchen
The tasks performed in the kitchen and its lighting needs are varied; the food preparation area
requires a high level of lighting (task lighting), while ambient lighting may suffice in the remainder of
the room.
It is for this reason that a distinction will be made between the worktop and the remainder of the
room.
Figure N.1 — Typical lighting scheme of a kitchen
N.2.2.1 Worktop lighting
Worktop lighting shall be relatively bright for carrying out fairly precise and sometimes hazardous
tasks (handling of knives, etc.).
169
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
In order to prevent the shadow of the person standing at the worktop obscuring the task, localized
lighting should be provided over the work area, for example by placing luminaires on the underside of
the cabinets situated above the worktop. Enclosed luminaires have the advantage of being easy to
clean, particularly as the light source is protected against splashing and spitting. Of all the possible
solutions, strip lights and spot lights placed under the cabinets constitute the best option.
N.2.2.2 Strip lights under cabinets
Strip lights located on the underside of the wall cabinets ensure uniform illumination of the worktop.
To avoid glare, it is advised to hide the light sources from direct view by means of an edge strip applied
to the underside of the cabinets or else by using a diffuser, in which case a higher luminous flux will be
required to compensate for absorption by the diffuser.
N.2.2.3 Spot lights under cabinets
Because they are directional, spot lights placed underneath the cabinets or above the worktop also
ensure good lighting. In general, a luminaire containing a single spot per cabinet unit (60 cm wide) will
provide a good level of worktop lighting.
N.2.2.4 Extractor hood lighting
The light sources on the underside of the extractor hood provide good light onto the hob area. Where a
new extractor hood is to be provided, it is preferable to opt for a model incorporating high light
output. All too often, however, existing extractor hoods are fitted with screw-type light sources. These
shall then be replaced, with particular attention being paid to the dimensions of the replacement
elements to ensure that they suit the geometry of the extractor. The same applies if the extractor hood
is fitted with light sources having a special base.
N.2.2.5 General and ambient lighting
The general lighting of the kitchen shall be fairly well distributed in order to ensure good lighting at
worktop level and avoid excessive contrast between the worktop and the remainder of the room.
N.2.2.6 Strip lights above cabinets
Strip lights located above the cabinets create indirect room lighting. It is generally recommended to
leave sufficient space between the top of the cabinets and the underside of the ceiling to ensure proper
dispersion of the light (a distance of the order of 50 cm is recommended). To avoid the risk of glare, a
strip can be provided along the top of the cabinet to hide the light sources from direct view. If the room
is relatively large and some walls are without cabinets, it may be advantageous, or even necessary, to
provide one or more additional light sources in order to ensure a sufficient uniformity of illumination
within the kitchen.
N.2.2.7 Ceiling lights
There are many efficient ceiling lights available on the market. In addition to the criterion of efficiency,
their choice is dictated more by aesthetics and personal taste. The number of ceiling lights to be
provided will mainly depend on the room dimensions and the level of lighting that is desired.
N.2.2.8 Chandeliers and pendant luminaires
Pendant luminaires are recommended only in rooms with high ceilings. This is because a distance of
40 to 50 cm is required between the luminaire and the ceiling, and also because the luminaire should
preferably be at a minimum height of 2 m so as not to obstruct movements.
170
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
N.2.2.9 Recessed downlights
Recessed downlights provide a relatively directional light. Various configurations and solutions are
available if it is wished to achieve a better distributed, less directional light than that created by a spot
light. For example, you can opt for "wall washers" (reflectors) or downlights with an opal light-
diffusing decoration. The number and distribution of downlights will be dictated by the desired effect.
Obviously the various proposed solutions can be combined. If the room is relatively large, strip lights
can be provided along the top of the cabinets, for example, together with a few downlights on the
opposite side. The indirect lighting will then create a soft, general ambient light, while the accentuation
will give the room depth.
N.2.3 Dining room
N.2.3.1 General
As far as the dining room is concerned, a distinction is made between the lighting of the dining table
and the general ambient lighting.
N.2.3.2 Dining table lighting
The table, the central feature of the dining room, should be well lit. This light can be ensured locally by
means of a pendant luminaire or via the general lighting.
N.2.3.3 Pendant luminaires
Pendant luminaires incorporating direct and indirect components are well suited for table lighting. It
may, however, cause an obstruction if it is too low. Solutions do exist, however, for adjusting the height
of the light fixture (adjustable cable system, etc). Ideally, the luminaire should be at a height of 1,7 to
1,8 m from the floor and should be adjustable to enable the room to be used under special
circumstances (family celebration, table moved, etc.).
The alternative to pendant luminaires is to use surface-mounted ceiling lights or downlights.
In addition to the table lighting, good ambient lighting shall also be provided, failing which there is a
risk of creating strong shadows and plunging the table into dark surroundings. According to the
luminaire used for table lighting, a second luminaire may not necessarily be needed for the ambient
lighting. However, in the event that another luminaire is provided, the ceiling light solution will only
rarely be adopted and preference will be given to other solutions, such as recessed downlights, wall
lights or cornice lighting.
N.2.3.5 Recessed downlights
Downlights are to be considered where their incorporation is possible. In general, as the table is
located in the centre of the room, the downlights will be placed along the walls and may be fitted with
reflectors called "wall washers" that direct the light onto the wall.
N.2.3.6 Wall lights
Wall lights can equally play a decorative or an ambient lighting role in dining rooms.
N.2.3.7 Cornice strip lighting
Cornice strip lighting creates an indirect lighting directed towards the wall and the ceiling. It is,
however, essential that the light sources are shielded from direct view by providing a cover strip made
of wood, plaster or any other material to suit the decor of the room.
171
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Different solutions can be adopted for this type of lighting:

— a channel, formed simply by attaching a plain moulding to the wall,
— a grooved recess formed in the wall,
— recessed ceiling light, providing indirect lighting.
The latter two options require fairly significant works (cutting of the wall, the ceiling, etc.), which
limits their applicability. Despite being based on indirect lighting, the cornice lighting solution is fairly
efficient, as it can be implemented using very high output light sources and luminaires.
It is also advisable to opt for systems that incorporate dimming if it is wished to alter the amount of
light and the mood of the lighting according to taste.
Figure N.2 — Channel Figure N.3 — Grooved Figure N.4 — Recessed

recessed ceiling light
N.2.4 Living room
N.2.4.1 General
The lighting needs of the living room are very variable. This modularity can be provided by placing a
number of different, individually-operated light sources or by means of a dimmable light source. As in
the dining room, we distinguish between ambient lighting and task lighting, focussing, in the case of
the living room, on the lighting specifically provided for reading.
N.2.4.2 Reading lights
The activity of reading in a living room requires brighter lighting than that provided by the general
lighting. Where the task requiring visual acuity is performed relatively close to a fixed light, it is
possible to use a (pendant or surface-mounted) ceiling light or a recessed downlight. Other solutions
involve the use of free-standing lights that have the advantage of being mobile and can therefore be
moved around to suit changes in the room layout. Directional lights are the most efficient. Another
option is to place a light source on a low table next to the reader.
The level of the general lighting required will depend on the configuration of the room and the choice
of luminaires. As in the case of the dining room, we can envisage the use of cornice strip lights, wall
lights or downlights.
The living room is also the preferred location for installing small decorative luminaires. These are
generally designed as decorative objects and are rarely very efficient. In this case, it is nevertheless
often possible to improve their efficiency by replacing the original light source with one that is more
efficient.
172
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
N.2.5 Bathroom and toilets
N.2.5.1 General
As far as the lighting of the bathroom is concerned, a distinction shall be made between two separate
applications: The general lighting and the mirror lighting, which it is best to control separately. The
particularity of the bathroom lighting is the high level of protection that the luminaires are required to
provide against water.
N.2.5.2 Mirror lighting
The lighting of the mirror shall be sufficiently bright to allow the performance of activities such as
shaving, make-up, etc. Placing wall-luminaires on either side of the mirror gives good illumination in
front of the mirror and prevents shadows on the face.
— Luminaire on either side of the mirror
If the option of a luminaire on either side of the mirror is adopted, these should be placed at eye level
to ensure uniform lighting of the mirror. It is also important to avoid lights that are too powerful, so as
not to create glare.
— Luminaire over the mirror
Although less good for lighting the face, this solution is nevertheless frequently used, as it has the
advantage of requiring only one luminaire instead of the two needed in the previous case. Moreover,
there are many more luminaires with a high water ingress protection (IP) rating available on the
market for this solution than for the previous one. Finally, it should also be noted that, with this
solution, it is easier to use luminaires controlled by built-in switches (one switch for a single
luminaire).
— Mirror with built-in luminaire
The light source of these mirrors is built into the mirror unit. The principle advantage of this type of
lighting is aesthetic, as the luminaire is perfectly integrated within the mirror. The disadvantage of this
type of solution is that it is still too often the case that, for reasons of electrical safety and connectivity,
it is difficult to find such units equipped with high light output light sources.
N.2.5.3 General lighting
According to the size of the room, bathroom lighting can be provided by one or a number of
luminaires, that can be either ceiling lights or recessed downlights. Care should always be taken, to
ensure that the luminaire complies with the ingress protection (IP) rating of the volume within which
it is installed. Downlights can be provided with protective covers that have the effect of increasing
their ingress protection rating but reducing their light output.
N.2.5.4 Toilet lighting
Toilet lighting generally consists of ceiling lights or recessed downlights. If the toilet includes a mirror
over the wash-hand basin, lighting can be ensured by wall lights.
N.2.6 Bedroom
N.2.6.1 General
Bedroom lighting design requires the bedrooms of adults and children to be considered separately, as
a child's bedroom is more multifunctional in nature, being a space for work, rest and play. As before,
we distinguish between task lighting and general lighting.
173
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Figure N.5 — Typical lighting scheme of a sleeping room
N.2.6.2 Task lighting
In a child's room, we generally distinguish a reading and desk area that requires to be brightly lit. Such
a level of lighting cannot be provided via the general lighting system without over-sizing the room's
light fittings. In addition to problems of over-consumption, this also prevents low or dimmed lighting
conditions being obtained that are appreciated by children when they go to sleep or wakeup. It is for
this reason that the general lighting is often combined with bedside luminaires or desk luminaires.
N.2.6.3 Bedside luminaires
Just like the living room table lights, bedside luminaires play a decorative, as well as a lighting role.
Here again, it is not always easy to find efficient luminaires on the market. It is then necessary to
ensure that the light source of the luminaire can be replaced with a high energy efficiency light source.
N.2.6.4 Desk luminaires
The situation in this case is somewhat different, as there are an increasing number of desk lamps on
the market that are equipped with efficient light sources that provide good localized lighting.
As localized task lighting is provided by additional luminaires, the general lighting level in the
bedroom (play area and/or passageway) should not be very high.
N.2.7 Entrance hall, corridors and stairs
The entrance hall, the stairs and the circulation areas require to be well lit at floor level to ensure
safety of movement. Lighting can be provided by ceiling lights, downlights, wall lights or a combination
of all three. Downlights will, however, be avoided at the top of stairs to avoid dazzling the people using
them. Where the ceilings are high, pendant ceiling lights can be used (in corridors rather than in stairs)
at a minimum height of 2 to 2,5 m.
N.2.8 Storeroom, cellar and laundry room
As these rooms are not living spaces, preference will be given to functional luminaires without too
much consideration for aesthetics. If no activity is performed in these rooms, their lighting
requirements will be relatively low, except within those areas where specific activities (ironing, DIY;
etc.) will be performed, where additional lighting will be provided.
Ceiling lights are the easiest means of lighting these rooms. An enclosed ceiling light with a
polycarbonate cover is to be preferred to a bare tube, as it provides better resistance to knocks and
splashing water, as well as being easier to clean.
174
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
N.3 Considerations about daylight

N.3.1 Key parameters
The key parameters of daylight supply are:

— Access to daylight
— The quantity of daylight entering the premises
— Visual contact with the outdoors
— The quality of the view
— The presence of a daylight management system (sun protections)
— Control of the daylight management system
N.3.2 Access to daylight
The presence of access to daylight is an important factor in user comfort. Contact with the outdoors
enables occupants to benefit from a source of natural light, without necessarily benefiting from a view
or visual contact with the outdoors.
Typically comprising a skylight (made from sandblasted or normal glass) will provide access to natural
lighting without establishing visual contact, whereas a vertical window in a wall would provide for
both functions of access to daylight and a visual contact with the outdoors.
Figure N.6 — Example of a system providing access to daylight
N.3.3 The quantity of daylight entering the premises
The daylight factor (DF) is a value used to characterize the provision and penetration of natural light
inside a building.
The daylight factor is the ratio between the natural lighting received at a given point on a horizontal
plane of reference, located inside a building, and the natural lighting at a point located outside the
building, in an open space, under an overcast sky as defined by the CIE (International Commission on
Illumination), where both light measurements are taken simultaneously.
The daylight factor is used to characterize and compare the daylighting of buildings independently
from their geographic location, the orientation of their openings and the level of absolute lighting. The
higher the daylight factor value, the more daylight that penetrates the premises.
The value to be considered is the daylight factor taken at the centre of the building and at a height of
0,85 m.
175
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
DF = (E int/ E ext) ⋅ 100 (%)
Key
1 E int / Work plane
2 E ext
Figure N.7 — Principle of daylight factor calculation
N.3.4 Visual contact with the outdoors
Visual contact with the outdoors is an important part of the visual comfort of the building occupants.
Providing a view of the outdoors gives the eye the possibility of occasionally focusing on a distant
point. This enables other muscles of the eyeball to work and thus prevent the occupant from becoming
overtired.
Furthermore, this window to the outdoors, providing the view, has a psychological effect on the
occupant.
Figure N.8 — Example of a living room with visual contact with the outdoors
N.3.5 Quality of the view
Although visual contact with the outdoors is an important factor, the quality of the view is also
important, however is relatively difficult to quantify as with all subjective notions.
— Three categories of views can be identified:
— Good views are considered to contain 'natural scenery'
— Average views are considered to contain 'non-degraded urban scenery'
176
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
— Poor views are considered to contain 'industrial scenery'
Figure N.9 — Example of a view Figure N.10 — Example Figure N.11 — Example of a view
considered to be of good quality of a view considered to considered to be of poor quality
be of average quality
N.3.6 Presence of a daylight management system
A daylighting management system is used to control and manage the supply of daylight within the
building. An advanced daylight management system is understood as a set of systems used to modify
the supply of daylight according to the natural lighting available, for example sun blinds, screens,
reflective Venetian blinds, etc.
Example of daylight management systems:
Figure N.12 — Outdoor Figure N.1 — Indoor Figure N.14 — Outdoor awning
horizontal slat blinds
Sources : Warema, Art et Lumière
N.3.7 Presence of a control system for the daylight management system
Management of the sun protection system is very important for the occupants.
The classification selected herein aims at highlighting automated systems providing for derogation.
Although automated management optimizes the management of sun protection systems (optimized
control of visual comfort and solar benefits), the possibility of derogation and manual control of sun
protection systems is also an important psychological factor for visual comfort. Indeed, even if users
do not make use of their control over the natural lighting management system, they consider their
visual comfort to be greater in the knowledge that this control is available to them.
177
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Figure N.15 — Example of a sun protection management system (external fabric blinds)
N.4 Targets
N.4.1 Lighting types
Two lighting types, corresponding to the most 2 categories of users, are defined:
— Optimized lighting solutions: optimal position of energy efficient luminaires with energy efficient
light sources
— Standard lighting Solutions: Standard position of Standard luminaires with energy efficient light
sources
The assumed efficacy of the optimized lighting solution is 60 lm/W and the standard lighting solution
is 15 lm/W.
The light output of the luminaires is function of the light output of the light source and the fixture.
Energy efficient light sources have to be used in combination of efficient fixture in order to have
energy efficient luminaires which presents luminous efficiency greater than 55 %.
N.4.2 Useful areas in domestic buildings
Different categories of surfaces were defined for each of the domestic room types:
— small
— large
— medium
Those values are based data issued from the Housing Statistics in the European Union 2010 report
published by the OTB Research Institute for the Built Environment, Delft University of Technology.
Default values of useful areas of places in domestic buildings can be found Table B.11 of the standard.
N.4.3 Values
Target values are of two types:

— Target values for general an ambient lighting
— Target values for task lighting
178
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
For each room type, target values for general and ambient lighting are dependant of the area and the
lighting type of the room so that there are 6 different target values for each room.
For several room types, target values for task lighting were defined. Those values are not function of
the area of the room. They are only function of the lighting type so that there are 2 different target
values for task lighting when specified.
Default values of the installed power for places in domestic buildings can be found at. in Table B.10 of
the standard
179
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annex O
(informative)
Lighting outside the building
O.1 General
Annex O describes the lighting provided outside the building that may draw the energy from the
building and may form part of the metered energy. The energy used by this lighting is not part of the
energy performance calculation.
However, this lighting has important function and may serve several roles.
O.2 Security lighting

With the onset of nightfall good visibility can only be obtained by good and suitable exterior lighting.
This lighting can reveal and enhance the detectability of people and objects around the building by
video cameras. Field studies have shown that good exterior lighting of building surrounds significantly
reduces crime to buildings during night time.
O.3 Pathway and amenity areas lighting

People exit from buildings at night need lighting outside in order to see their way to the roads or car
parks safely. This lighting helps to reduce accidents on the pathways, gives reassurances to minimize
the fear of crime and permits quick identification of the location and entry into cars.
O.4 Architectural floodlighting

Floodlighting decorative or historic building facades, entirely or partly as an eye-catching feature,
enhances the attraction and identification of the building. Such illuminated facades have become an
important part of the night time rural and city centre environments and beautify the buildings for
people's enjoyment.
O.5 Lighting of outdoor workplaces

There are many outdoor workplaces that are functional at times when there is insufficient daylight to
meet the required task illuminance. The standard EN 12464-2 gives full details of the recommended
lighting requirements for various outdoor work places and task activities. In some instances the
electric power to the lighting system to provide the required illumination maybe supplied from the
building but this power is not part of the building's lighting power and is not included in the
estimation of the energy required for lighting. Also when using method 3, if the energy to these
outdoor lights is metered by the same meter as used for the indoor lights the proportion of energy
used outdoors should be deducted from the total metered value. Ideally a separate meter should be
employed.
180
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Annex P
(informative)
Method for estimating energy for lighting hourly
P.1 General
In 6.1.2, Time steps, it is pointed out that in Method 1 the energy for lighting at hourly intervals cannot
be estimated accurately as there are many uncontrolled variables or dependence factors for which
assumptions have to be made. This Annex N describes an approximate estimating method for hourly
periods of the energy required for lighting (WL) during the occupied times (tocc) of the room or zone
relative to annual (Wan) and monthly (Wm) energy use.
P.2 Assumptions
The occupancy time and duration are defined by other standards.
P.3 Data input

6.3 of the standard defines the required input data
6.4 of the standard defines the calculation steps to obtain values for Pn, Pem, Ppc, FO, FC, FD,S and FD,C
νMonth factors are in Table F.17 of the standard for vertical facades and in Table F.18 for rooflight of the
standard and Table P.1 gives monthly values for East and West facing facades and rooflights.
Typical hours of daytime for the middle of each month are shown in Table P.2.
P.4 Calculations
The hourly energy for lighting required night time (WN) is given by Formula P.1
( ∑ PN ×FO × FC ) + ∑ Pem + ∑ Ppc

WN = [ kWh ] (P.1)
1 000
The hourly energy for lighting required daytime (WD) is given by Formula P.2
(
∑PN )
× FO × FC × FD ,Month + ∑Pem + ∑Ppc
WD = kWh [ ] (P.2)
1 000
Where
FD ,Month = S × FD ,C ×ν Month
1 − ( FD ,
) (P.3)
P.5 Energy required

The hourly required energy for lighting WL is calculated by Formula P.4 for times during night time
and P.2 for times during daytime for the occupied times of the day of the month. Table P.2 gives the
hours of daytime and the occupancy period should be linked to the times the heating or cooling is
required. The annual required energy for lighting Wan is calculated by Formula P.5 for the occupied
times at night times tN and for the occupied times during daytime tD and where WN and WD are average
hourly values.
181
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
NOTE In standard ISO/DIS 52016 WL is known as Specific internal heat flow rate due to lighting qint;L.
WL
= WN + WD [kWh] (P.4)
WL ,an WN × t N + WD × t D
=
[kWh/y] (P.5)
Table P.1 — Values of νMonth for each calendar month

Month νMonth
January 0,74
February 0,92
March 1,06
April 1,16
May 1,22
June 1,24
July 1,22
August 1,16
September 1,06
October 0,93
November 0,75
December 0,54
Table P.2 — Typical Hours of Daytime for the middle of each month for latitude 52,5°
Date Sunrise Sunset
15 January 08:06 16:14
14 February 07:24 17:07
15 March 06:20 17:59
15 April 06:11 19:50
15 May 05:17 20:38
15 June 04:52 21:11
15 July 05:10 21:03
15 August 05:54 20:17
15 September 06:42 19:10
15 October 07:30 16:02
15 November 07:25 16:06
15 December 08:06 15:47
P.6 Worked example of hourly energy for lighting

The hourly energy for lighting in this worked example makes use of the details and data obtained for
the office described in J.1.1.4 of this Technical Report. The open plan office for 24 staff of a
manufacturing building located in middle England and the summary of the known information as
given in J.1.1.4 is given here. Size, 18 m × 8 m × 3 m having 18 m × 2 m East facing window. The
illuminance is 500 lx. The electric lighting consist of 24 off twin 28 W suspended fluorescent lamp
luminaires with DALI control, dimmable daylight and occupancy linked detections 2 off these
luminaires also operate as self-contained maintained emergency luminaires . There are 2 off 18 W
fluorescent lamp exit signs and there are 2 off 5,6 W LED emergency bulkheads outside the final exit
but these do not participate in the indoor energy balance so can be ignored.
The data required from J.1.1.4 are MF = 0,8 , FC = 0,89, FO = 0,9, FD,s,SNA = 0,746, FD,C = 0,8, PN1 = 1 452
[W], PN2 = 30 [W], Pem1 = 14 [W], Pem2 = 6 [W], Ppc1 = 4,8 [W] and Ppc2 = 0,4 [W]
182
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Therefore the installed power for illumination PN = PN1 + PN2 = 1 452 + 30 = 1 482 [W], the total
standby power for battery charging in the emergency luminaires Pem = Pem1 + Pem2 = 14 + 6 = 20 [W]
and the total standby power for automatic lighting controls Pem = Ppc1 + Ppc2 = 4,8 + 0,4 = 5,2 [W]
Therefore –
A, Night time energy used
using Formula P.1 when the office is occupied the Night time energy (WN) used per
hour = (1 482 × 0,9 × 0,89) + 20 + 5,2 = 1 212,28 [Wh] or 1,21 [kWh]
B, Daytime energy used
Using Formula P.2 when the office is occupied the Daytime energy (WD) used per
hour = (1 482 × 0,9 × 0,89 × FD,Month) + 20 + 5,2 = 1 187,1FD,Month + 20 + 5,2 [Wh]
Now FD,Month = FD ,C ×ν Month ) where νMonth changes with the months in the year as shown in
1 − ( FD , S ×
Table P.1. Therefore for each month FD,Month can also be calculated by FD,Month = 1 – (0,746 × 0,8 × νMonth
= 1 – 0,6 νMonth with the results shown in Table P.3.
Table P.3 — Calculated values of FD,Month and daytime energy WD used for lighting per hour in
the office
Month νMonth FD,Month WD [kWh]
January 0,74 0,556 0,685
February 0,92 0,448 0,557
March 1,06 0,364 0,457
April 1,16 0,304 0,386
May 1,22 0,268 0,343
June 1,24 0,256 0,329
July 1,22 0,268 0,343
August 1,16 0,304 0,386
September 1,06 0,364 0,457
October 0,93 0,442 0,576
November 0,75 0,550 0,678
December 0,54 0,676 0,827
Using the values in Table P.3, for example for January, gives WD, January = (1 187,1 × 0,556) + 20 +5,2 =
710,2 [Wh] or 0,71 [kWh]. This calculation procedure should be repeated for each month to obtain the
energy for lighting values with in the daylight hours of occupancy.
The annual operating hours at night tN = 75 h and daytime tD = 2 271 h as shown in J.1.1.4 of this
Technical Report. The annual energy for lighting WL,an = 1,21 × 75 + 0,71 × 2 271 = 1 703,16 [kWh/y]
This value is 16 % higher than the annual energy (W) 1 462,17 [kWh/y] calculated by Method 1, the
more accurate calculation method, shown in J.1.1.4 of the Technical Report.
183
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
Bibliography
[1] Directive 2002/91/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 December 2002 on
the energy performance of buildings, [EF1]
[2] Mandate M/343 Mandate to CEN, CENELEC and ETSI for the elaboration and adoption of
standards for a methodology calculating the integrated energy performance of buildings and
estimating the environmental impact, in accordance with the terms set forth in Directive
2002/91/EC; 30 January 2004, [EF2]
[3] Mandate M480, Mandate to CEN, CENELEC and ETSI for the elaboration and adoption of
standards for a methodology calculating the integrated energy performance of buildings and
promoting the energy efficiency of buildings, in accordance with the terms set in the recast of
the Directive on the energy performance of buildings (2010/31/EU) of 14th December 2010,
[EF3]
[4] Recast of the Directive on the energy performance of buildings (2010/31/EU) of 14th December
2010, [EF4]
[5] CEN/TS 16628, Energy Performance of Buildings - Basic Principles for the set of EPB standards
[6] CEN/TS 16629, Energy Performance of Buildings - Detailed Technical Rules for the set of EPB-
standards
[7] CEN ISO/TR 52000-2, Energy performance of Buildings — Overarching EPB assessment Part 2:
Explanation and justification of EN ISO 52000-1
[8] CENSE report WP6.1_N05rev02: Set of recommendations: Towards a second generation of CEN
standards related to the Energy Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD), May 27, 2010. and
reports on specific clusters of standards, See www.iee-cense.eu
[9] EN 13032-1:2004+A1:2012, Light and lighting - Measurement and presentation of photometric

data of lamps and luminaires - Part 1: Measurement and file format
[10] EN 13032-2: 2004, Light and lighting - Measurement and presentation of photometric data of
lamps and luminaires - Part 2: Presentation of data for indoor and outdoor work places
[11] GIL 65, Action Energy, 2004 Metering use in non-domestic buildings
[12] CIE Publication 158-2004. Ocular lighting effects on human physiology and behaviour
[13] CIE 97:2005, Guide on the maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems
[14] CIE S011:2003, Spatial distribution of daylight — CIE Standard general sky
[15] CHARTERED INSTITUTION OF BUILDING SERVICES ENGINEERS. ‘Daylighting and window design’
Lighting Guide 10. CIBSE, London, 1999
[16] BELL J., BURT W. ‘Designing buildings for daylight’ BRE report. Garston. CRC, 1995
[17] LITTLEFAIR P.J., AIZLEWOOD M. ‘Daylight in atrium buildings’ BRE information paper IP3/98, CRC.
Garston, 1998
184
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
[18] LITTLEFAIR P.J. ‘Site layout planning for daylight and sunlight; a guide to good practice’ BRE
report, CRC. Garston, 1992
[19] Littlefair P J, ‘Selecting lighting controls’ BRE Digest 498, 2006
[20] LITTLEFAIR P.J. ‘Daylighting design for display screen equipment’. BRE Information Paper IP10/95.
Garston. CRC, 1995
[21] LITTLEFAIR P.J. ‘Photoelectric control of lighting, design, setup and installation aspects’ Building
Research Establishment Information Paper IP2/99. Garston. CRC, 1999
[22] LITTLEFAIR P.J. ‘Designing with innovative daylighting’. BRE Report BR 305. Garston. CRC, 1996
[23] FONTOYNONT M., ed. ‘Daylight performance of buildings’ James and James, London, 1998
[24] Littlefair P J, 'Average daylight factor: a simple basis for daylight design' Building Research
Establishment Information Paper 15/88. (Garston, BRE, 1988)
[25] TREGENZA P.R. Mean daylight illuminance in rooms facing sunlit streets. Bldg & Environ. 1995,
30 (1) pp. 83–89
[26] BAKER N., FANCHIOTTI A., STEEMERS K., eds. Daylighting in architecture James & James. London,
1993
[27] BRECSU FOR DEPARTMENT OF THE ENVIRONMENT. ‘Electric lighting controls – a guide for designers,
installers and users’ Good Practice Guide 160, BRECSU. Garston, 1997
[28] HUNT D.R.G. The use of artificial lighting in relation to daylight levels and occupancy. Bldg &
Environ. 1979, 14 (1) pp. 21–33
[29] Hunt D R G. 'Predicting lighting use - a method based upon observed patterns of behaviour Ltg
Res & Technol 12 (1) 7-14, 1980.
[30] LITTLEFAIR P.J. Predicting annual lighting use in daylit buildings. Build. Environ. 1990, 25 (1)
pp. 43–54
[31] LYNES J.A., LITTLEFAIR P.J. Lighting energy savings from daylight: estimation at the sketch design
stage. Light. Res. Technol. 1990, 22 (3) pp. 129–137
[32] de Boer, J.; Cornelius, W.; Wössner, S.: Ein einfaches Modell zur Ermittlung des
Endenergiebedarfs für Beleuchtungszwecke in Räumen mit Dachoberlichtern. gi Gesundheits-
ingenieur 126, H. 3, S. 113-123.
[33] Society of Light and Lighting: Lighting for communal residential buildings. Lighting Guide LG9:
2013
[34] Thomas Pocklington Trust, Housing for people with sight loss: A design guide, 2008
[35] VAN BOMMEL W.J.M., VAN DYK J.P.M. Security lighting for domestic exteriors. Proceedings of the
IESNA Annual Conference, St Louis (1984)
[36] Fisher A.J: Road lighting as an accident counter-measure Australian road research, 7, 3-16,
1977.
185
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
[37] CIBSE Guide F – Energy Efficiency in Buildings 3rd edition 2012, ISBN 978-1-906846-22-0
[38] CIBSE TM54. Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage. 2013
[39] LOE D.L. Quantifying lighting energy efficiency: a discussion document. Light. Res. Technol. 2003,
35 (4) pp. 319–329
[40] BANWELL P., BRONS J., FREYSSINIER-NOVA J.P., RIZZO P., FIGUEIRO M. A demonstration of energy-
efficient lighting in residential new construction. Light. Res. Technol. 2004, 36 (2) pp. 147–164
[41] MARDALJEVIC J., HESCHONG L., LEE E. Daylight metrics and energy savings. Light. Res. Technol.
2009, 41 pp. 261–283
[42] IEA. Annex 45 Guidebook on energy efficient electric lighting for buildings, ISBN 978-952-60-
3229-0 http://lightinglab.fi/IEAAnnex45/
[43] FERIDE Ş.E.N.E.R. Sezen YILDIRIM ÜNNÜ, Alpin KÖKNEL YENER: Lighting energy performance
assessment tools for building certification systems in Europe, Proceedings of CIE 27th Session,
Sun City. South Africa
[44] Friedrich W. Bremecker: Determination of the Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator (LENI) in the
lighting design process, Proceedings of Lux-Europa 2009, Istanbul
[45] Piotr Pracki: Criteria for Assessment of Lighting Energy Efficiency in Interiors, Proceedings of
Lux-Europa 2009, Istanbul
[46] RATTUNDE R. Optimierung der Tageslichtbeleuchtung großer Räume durch Oberlichter unter
Berücksichtigung des zur Verfügung stehenden Tageslichtes. Dissertation Technische
Universität Berlin (1980).
[47] EN 12464-1, Light and lighting - Lighting of work places - Part 1: Indoor work places
[48] EN 12193, Light and lighting - Sports lighting
[49] de Boer, J.; Aydinli, S.; Cornelius, W.; Jakobiak, R.; Minnerup, J.; Schornick, D.; Wershoven, R.:
Neue Effizienzkennzahlen für Beleuchtungssysteme in Gebäuden. Bauphysik Nr. 4, August
2011.
[50] IBP-Bericht WB160/2012 - Weiterentwicklung von Verfahren für die Bewertung der
Energieeffizienz von Beleuchtungsanlagen im Rahmen der EnEV Methode einschließlich der
Festlegung von Mindestanforderungen.
[51] Housing Statistics in the European Union 2010 report, OTB Research Institute for the Built
Environment, Delft University of Technology, The Hague: Ministry of the Interior and Kingdom
Relations, Netherlands, September 2010
[52] L’éclairage efficace des logements - Guide pratique à destination du particulier, Région
Wallonne, 2011, Namur
[53] LIGHT‘S LABOUR’S LOST - POLICIES FOR ENERGY-EFFICIENT LIGHTING. IEA - International Energy
Agency, 2011, Paris
[54] Preparatory Studies for Eco-design Requirements of EuPs - Final report - Lot 19: Domestic
lighting, Van Tichelen (P.), 2009, 657 m. http://www.eup4light.net/ - Last access 12/05/2014
186
CEN/TR 15193-2:2017 (E)
[55] PROBE - Pragmatic Renovation of Office buildings for a Better Environment, Schouwenaars S.,
Heijmans N., Vandaele L. Wouters P., BBRI, 2005
[56] Results and findings of the EU ENPER Project, Wouters P. Vandaele L. Visier J.C., Santamouris
M., van Dijk D., IEECB’04 Conference, Frankfurt, 2004
[57] Report on the Application of CEN Standard EN 15193 EN 15193: Energy Performance of
Buildings Energy Requirements for Lighting, January 2010 http://www.iee-cense.eu/ - Last
access 12/05/2014
[58] SIA 380/4:2005, Building Electrical Energy in Building, Swiss Society of Engineers and Architects,
POB, CH-8039 Zurich
[59] Belendorf H., Rosemann A., Aydinli S., Kaase H.About energy savings through daylight
dependent lighting, 2003
[60] Bodart M., Roisin B., Deneyer A., D’Herdt P. ‘Establishment of innovation guidelines for the
residential lighting from a relighting project’, Lux Europa 2009, 8-10 September 2009, Istanbul,
Turkey, 8 p, 9 réf.
[61] DEROISY B., DENEYER A., D’HERDT P. 'Guide technique et pratique de l'éclairage résidentiel’
Monographie CSTC, BEL, 2010 n°6, 24 p.
[62] Deneyer A., D’Herdt P.; Roisin B., Bodart M. ‘The use of energy efficiency in dwellings –
Challenges and potential’, Lux Europa 2009, 8-10 September 2009, Istanbul, Turkey, 8 p, 4 réf.
[63] GASPAROVSKY D., RADITSCHOVA J. Home Lighting, Svelto 2013, Pobbanska. Slovensko. 2013, 23-
25 (October) pp. 195–205
[64] Littlefair P.; The impact of lighting controls in energy performance prediction, 2004
[65] MARDALJEVIC J., ANDERSEN M., ROY N., CHRISTOFFERSEN J. Daylighting Metrics for residential
buildings, CIE 27th Session, July 2011, Sun City ZA, p 91 – 111.
[66] PROBE - Pragmatic Renovation of Office buildings for a Better Environment, Schouwenaars S.,
Heijmans N., Vandaele L. Wouters P., BBRI, 2005
187

64 e stf-1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

64 e stf-1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TECHNICAL REPORT CEN/TR 15193-2

ICS 91.120.10; 91.140.99; 91.160.01

Energy performance of buildings - Energy requirements

EUROPEAN COMMITTEE FOR STANDARDIZATION

CEN-CENELEC Management Centre: Avenue Marnix 17, B-1000 Brussels

8 Method 3 – Metered energy used for lighting..................................................................................... 53

C.1 Installed power assessment for tertiary buildings .......................................................................... 64

F.10 References .................................................................................................................................................... 125

J.2.2 Example 2 – New design residential bungalow ............................................................................... 157

K.4.4 Integrated building control system..................................................................................................... 163

N.2.6 Bedroom ........................................................................................................................................................ 173

— Part 1: Specifications, Module M9

— Part 2: (Technical Report) Explanation and justification of EN 15193-1, Module M9

The set of EPB standards, technical reports and supporting tools

b) a document with detailed technical rules to be followed in drafting EPB-standards;

— to reduce the page count of the actual standard, and

— to facilitate understanding of the set of EPB standards.

Figure 1 — General overview of the comprehensive lighting design process

— explanation on the procedures and gives background information;

— justification of the choices that have been made;

— description of the processes;

— spreadsheet of the calculation process;

— worked examples and benchmark values;

— advice on lighting control systems; and

— guidance on the lighting design for domestic buildings.

EN 15193-1:2017, Energy performance of buildings - Energy requirements for lighting - Part 1:

EN ISO 52000-1:2017, Energy performance of buildings — Overarching EPB assessment — Part 1:

3 Terms and definitions

4 Symbols and abbreviations

DSA Mean daylight factor with rooflight, shading activated %

DSNA Mean daylight factor with rooflight, shading not activated %

EA Horizontal external illuminance from an overcast sky lx

ESUR Maintained illuminance on immediate surround of task area lx

Fu Utilization factor of the luminaire -

ttot Total operating hours h

5 Brief description of the method(s) and routing

6 Method 1 – Calculation of the energy required for lighting

Place Luminaire Unique ID Quantity Description of control

Luminaire Unique ID Luminaire circuit power Luminaire controls Luminaire standby

6.5 Operating conditions

Figure 3 — Flow diagram for lighting energy calculations

6.7 Expenditure factors for lighting systems

a) Depiction of the influences on the energy need for lighting Wnd

Electric lighting eL,ES

6.7.1 Energy need and energy use for lighting

— Maintenance of lighting installations: spaces distinguished by high maintenance factors (e.g.

Wus =p ⋅ [ AD ( t Day ⋅ FD ⋅ FO ⋅ FC + t Night ⋅ FO ⋅ FC ) (2)

energy use Wus (standard Formula 16)

6.7.2.2 Partial expenditure factor for constant illuminance control eL,C

1 reference maintenance factor

1 manual on/ auto off

AD tDay ⋅ (1 − FD,S ⋅ FD,C ) + t Night  + AND ( tDay + t Night )

Space type Normalized Typical Partial expenditure factor for daylight-

Personal 1,0 0,7

Open floor 0,2 0,7

b) Simplified utilization factor method (introduced in this Technical Report)

a) Determination of eL,ES when applying the standard’s method 1 (comprehensive calculation)

Partial expenditure factor for delivery of electric light

Upward flux Room index k

P Pj⋅lx ⋅ Etask ⋅ FMF ⋅ FCA ⋅ FL Pj⋅lx ⋅ FL

6.7.3 Application of expenditure factors

6.7.3.2 Example calculation of expenditure factors for lighting systems

a) Circulation area b)Personal office (single occupant) c) Conference room